JP2020058620A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of notifying an operation effective period of performance operation means in a manner that can be easily recognized by a player.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes main control means (main control board 100), performance control means (peripheral control board 200), a light emission performance device (segment performance display device 74) whose lighting is controlled by the performance control means, and a performance input device (performance button 3k) for inputting input information to the performance control means on the basis of an input operation by a player. The performance control means can execute a player operation input performance that can change the performance mode being executed based on the input of the input information by the performance input device, and causes the light emission performance device to execute a light emission performance, during an input effective notification period of the player operation input performance, in any one of a normal mode and a chance mode indicating that expectation in which benefit is given to the player is higher than that in the normal mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 78

Description

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is applicable to ball-ball type gaming machines (also referred to as “pachinko gaming machines”, “pachinko machines”, etc.) and spinning drum type gaming machines (also referred to as “slot machines”, “pachi-slot machines”, etc.). It relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with a handle for launching a game ball into a game area, a stop button for stopping a reel, and other operation means for game progression operated by a player. In addition, for the purpose of enhancing the enjoyment of the game by the player, there is also known a gaming machine provided with operating means for production (for example, production button etc.) in addition to the operating means for advancing the game. It is common for a gaming machine to have a function of an operation effect for performing a predetermined effect based on an operation means for operation being operated by a player during an effective operation period such as during symbol change.

  Then, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that emits light to notify the operation effective period of the operation means for effect (operation means for effect). In the case of the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, a notice notification light emitting means for performing a light emitting effect for notifying a lottery result regarding a game in advance and an operation that enables an externally operable effect operation means. The effective period informing light emitting means for informing that the effective period is in progress is configured by a common light emitting means (for example, a rotating lamp), and the common light emitting means is arranged in the vicinity of the production operation means to notify the user. The player can easily distinguish between the advance notice and the operation valid period by causing the player to emit light in different light emission modes depending on the intended use. Specifically, when giving the advance notice, the rotating lamp is made to emit light in the light emitting mode in which the LED is continuously turned on while rotating the reflector, and when giving the notification of the operation valid period, the reflector is not rotated. It is exemplified that the revolving lamp is caused to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the LED blinks.

JP, 2011-087640, A

  However, the method of notifying the operation valid period by the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 only notifies that the operation valid period is in progress, and cannot perform various notifications regarding the operation valid period. . For example, it is not possible to inform the entire operation effective period such as how much the entire operation effective period is, or how much the remaining operation effective period is, so that the player can operate with sufficient margin. There was a problem to fully bring out the playability of the operation effect, such as not being able to enjoy the effect.

  Here, as a method for solving the above-mentioned problem, it is conceivable to notify the operation valid period on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device that performs variable display of the decorative pattern and the like. In this case, since the liquid crystal display device can display a dynamic image, it is easy to display the entire operation effective period and the remaining operation effective period. In addition, it is possible to derive various effect modes for the instruction of the operation content and the teaching of the operation result. However, the gaming machine is not always configured with the liquid crystal display device. Even if the liquid crystal display device is provided, it is assumed that it is difficult to notify the effective operation period when the liquid crystal display device fails or an accessory is operating in front of the liquid crystal screen. It

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem to be improved regarding the notification of the operation effective period for the operation means for effect.

  Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned problems, the present invention can notify the operation effective period of the operation means for production in a mode that can be easily recognized by the player without using a dynamic image display means such as a liquid crystal display device. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the present invention, main control means for controlling the progress of the game, effect control means for executing an effect according to the progress of the game by the main control means, and lighting control by the effect control means A gaming machine is provided which includes a light emitting effect device that produces light, and an effect input device that inputs input information to the effect control means based on an input operation by a player. In this gaming machine, the effect control means is capable of executing a player operation input effect that can change the effect mode being executed based on the input of the input information by the effect input device, and the player operation input In the production period of the production, an introduction production period for urging the input operation to the production input device, an input effective notification period for informing that the input operation to the production input device is effective, and the production input device to the production input device. When the input operation satisfies a predetermined input condition, a post-operation performance period for notifying a profit given to the player in the game being executed by the main control means or a degree of expectation of giving the profit, included. Further, in the gaming machine, the effect control means, in the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect, causes the light emission effect by the light emission effect device to be in the normal mode and the player is more profitable than the normal mode. It is possible to carry out the execution in any one of a chance mode indicating that the expected degree to be performed is high.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the operation effective period of the operation means for production in a manner that can be easily recognized by the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front in the state where the glass frame was opened from the front frame and the front frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine decomposed | disassembled into the glass frame, the game board, the front frame, and the outer frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine decomposed | disassembled into the glass frame, the game board, the front frame, and the outer frame from the back. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is a rear view of the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back of the game board from the left back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back of the game board from the right back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view (1) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (2) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (3) of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. It is a front view of a game board having a board configuration suitable for the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a symbol display area. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and design of a reel. It is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon that can be displayed by the sub effect display device. It is an enlarged view of the degree of expectation display LED. It is a control block diagram showing an electrical configuration example of the gaming machine. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of functions of the main control board shown in FIG. 24. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the function of the effect control board shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol win / loss table. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol table per special symbol. It is a figure showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the deviation. It is a figure which shows an example of a variation pattern prefetch determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side main processing. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing on the main control side following FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process by the side of the main control following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process of the main control side continuous to FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening supervisory control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting opening monitoring control processing following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process following FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special electric auditors product control processing. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of special electric auditors product control processing subsequent to FIG. 51. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of special electric auditors product control processing subsequent to FIG. 52. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reset start processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production state shift processing shown in Drawing 56. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the change effect contents determination processing shown in FIG. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit production contents decision processing which is shown in Figure 56. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit production contents decision processing which continues in Figure 59. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of image control command transmission interruption processing. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in roulette reach production. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the effect display device in the roulette reach effect of the standard pattern. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in the roulette reach production of the chance pattern. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in the roulette reach production of the intense heat pattern. It is a diagram for explaining the stop type of the reel re-stop for each development pattern in the roulette reach production. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in the seven reach production with one reach line. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in the seven reach production with two reach lines. It is a figure showing the flow of the display contents of the production display device in a vision chance production. It is a diagram for explaining the nail rotation step-up notice effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the nail rotation step-up notice effect. It is the figure which shows the flow of pre-reading object reservation expectation suggestion production of production pattern B. It is the figure which shows the flow of pre-reading object reservation expectation suggestion production of production pattern A. It is a figure for explaining an example of a player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single push. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a segment display. It is a figure for explaining a concrete example of segment display in operation input production. It is a figure for explaining an example of the player operation input production (chance pattern) of single push. It is the figure in order to explain one example of the player operation input production of consecutive hits. It is a figure for explaining a concrete example of segment display in a repeated hit challenge. It is the figure in order to explain one example of the player operation input production of long pushing. It is the figure in order to explain one example of the player operation input production of the single push when automatic operation is effective.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Structure of pachinko machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. In addition, FIG. 2 and subsequent figures show the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from another direction and disassembled. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a state where the glass frame is opened from the front frame and the front frame is opened from the outer frame, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is the glass frame, the game board, the front. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a frame and an outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame as seen from the rear. Is.

  The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility of a game hall, a glass frame (door frame) 3 that opens and closes the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 3 that can be opened and closed. Then, a game board having a front frame 4 that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2 and a game area 5a that is detachably attached to the front frame 4 from the front, is visible through the glass frame 3, and is hit with a game ball. 5 and.

  The outer frame 2 has a rectangular shape in which frames 2a and 2b extending vertically in the left-right direction and frames 2c, 2d extending vertically in the left-right directions are combined, and is provided with hinge members 2e, 2f on the left and right edges from the front, The hinge member supports the front frame 4 and the glass frame 3 so as to be opened / closed laterally and detachably.

  A glass frame 3 is attached to the front surface side of the front frame 4 so as to be opened and closed laterally and detachably by hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b on the left edge portion when facing the front surface. The glass frame 3 is held in a closed state by a glass plate covering the front surface of the glass frame 3 using a locking device 3c. On the upper half of the front frame 4 located behind the glass frame 3, a game board 5 is detachably mounted from the front side of the front frame 4, and the game frame 5 of the glass frame 3 closed and held as described above. The game area 5a in front of the game board 5 is visible through the laminated glass.

  The glass frame 3 has a base unit 3e having a through-hole 3d that penetrates the front and rear in a quadrangular shape, a dish unit 3f that stores game balls under the front surface of the base unit 3e, and a game board 5 that stores the game balls stored in the dish unit 3f. And a region 3g for accommodating a handle 4a which can be operated by the player for driving into the game region. On the front side of the glass frame 3, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 3h that emits light according to the progress of the game and a speaker 3i that outputs sound according to the progress of the game are provided. At the center of the front surface of the plate unit 3f, an effect button 3j that is pressed by the player is provided. In addition, the base of the effect button 3j has a lever structure that can be tilted toward the front side (player side) to a predetermined angle, and functions as a second effect button 3k that is pulled by the player. Note that the second effect button 3k may have a structure that allows a pull-in operation at all times, but in consideration of the operability of the effect button 3j and the like, it is normally fixed to the OFF side by a lock mechanism or the like, and when performing a specific effect. It is preferable that the lock is released to enable the pulling operation (ON operation).

  The front frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and supports the outer periphery of the game board 5, a hinge of the outer frame 2 above and below the frame body 4b on the left side in front view, and a door frame 3 Hinges 4c and 4d that are rotatably attached, a ball launching device 4e that is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the frame 4b, and that is used to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; 4b, which is attached to the right side surface of the front view of 4b, and locks the outer frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 3 with a locking unit 4f, and a board unit 4g attached to the lower rear surface of the frame 4b. And a rear cover 4h that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame body 4b on the rear side of the frame body 4b. The board unit 4g accommodates a speaker unit, a power supply board, an interface control board, and a payout control board that controls payout of gaming balls.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotationally operates the game ball launching device 4a, the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength according to the angle. Then, when the game ball hit in the game area 5a is received in the winning opening (ball entrance), a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out according to the received winning opening. By paying out the game balls, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 10 is a rear view of the game board, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the back of the game board seen from the left rear, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the back of the game board seen from the right rear, FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 14 is a disassembled rear view of the game board for each major configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from above.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit. The game board 5 is configured by combining a front unit 100m, a back unit 200m, a liquid crystal base 300m, and a liquid crystal display device (effect display device) 70. The table unit 100m is attached to the front side of the front member 100a and the rear side of the front member 100a that partition the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape, and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A game panel 100b is provided, and a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined array at a position inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 100b.

  The front member 100a is provided with a function display unit 100c in the lower right corner that allows the player to visually recognize the game status based on a control signal from the main control unit 5b (main control board 100 that controls the overall game). The liquid crystal display device 70 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and displays a predetermined effect image. On the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 70, a peripheral control unit 5c (production control board 200 that controls overall production) is attached. The liquid crystal base 300m is opened on the back unit 200m side, accommodates the back unit 200m, and the liquid crystal display device 70 is attached to the back surface of the liquid crystal base 300m.

  The gaming panel 100b has a peripheral shape substantially the same as that of the front member 100a, is made of a transparent flat panel plate, is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a, and further includes a holder to which the back unit 200m is attached on the rear surface. The front member 100a can receive the game balls at different positions in the game area 5a, which are different from the general prize holes 66, which are always open to receive the game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A first starting opening 61 that is always open, a gate 63 that is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of a game ball (integrally formed in an attacker unit 500 described later), and a game ball serves as a gate. A second starting port 62 (integrally formed in an attacker unit 500 described later) that allows the acceptance of a game ball according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery that is drawn by passing, and the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 61. Depending on the result of the first special lottery drawn by or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, the winning prize 64 which allows the game ball to be accepted at any time (described later) Ata Comprises integrally formed) on mosquito unit 500. The gate 63, the second starting opening 62, and the special winning opening 64 are inside the attacker unit 500, and are not shown here.

  The second starting port is provided with an ordinary electric accessory which is composed of a movable piece, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory. The ordinary electric accessory has a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state, depending on the energized state of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid. Can be changed alternately. The second starting port has a structure in which the game ball is difficult to enter unless the ordinary electric auditors are in the open state, while the game ball is easy to enter when the ordinary electric auditors is in the open state. The front member 100a includes a first out port 29 immediately below the first starting port 61 at the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 500 is located on the lower right of the front member 100a. The attacker unit 500 is a unit that mainly includes a movable piece that opens and closes the special winning opening 64 and serves as a special electric accessory 642, in which a plurality of parts are integrated together.

  The back unit 200m has an opening 200a for visually recognizing the liquid crystal display screen at the rear. The back unit 200m has a sensor for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 66, the first starting opening 61, etc., a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the liquid crystal base 300m, and a passage for discharging the game ball. Prepare

  The front member 100a has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is defined by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front member 100a extends from the center in the left-right direction in a front view in an arc shape along a clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end on the left side, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in front view, and extends to a diagonally upper right portion. An inner rail 100d that is disposed inside the front member 100a substantially along 100f and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 100d in a front view right side of the game area 5a An out guide path 100e that is formed at the lowest position and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The game panel 100b is provided with a center decoration 22 that projects toward the front member 100a around the opening having the same shape as the opening of the front member 100a. When the game panel 100b is fixed to the front member 100a, the center ornament 22 is fitted into the opening so as to match the shape of the opening of the front member 100a, and decorates around the opening 100h of the front unit 100m. The player can recognize the effect screen and the behavior of the effect device through the opening 100h. The center decoration 22 is a kind of a decorative body, and exerts a decorative function of assisting the screen of the effect display device 70 at the center of the game board 5. The center ornament 22 may be provided with a movable accessory (movable effect device) that performs an effect operation according to the progress of the game. The movable accessory is operated by a drive source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. The center decoration 22 may be provided with a lamp that emits light according to the progress of the game.

  The main control unit 5b (see FIG. 7) is mounted on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 70 and below the peripheral control unit 5c. The main control unit 5b includes a main control board 100 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board case 100n for housing the main control board 100 (see FIG. 16). The main control unit 5b controls the game contents, the prize balls of the game balls, and the like.

  The function display unit 100c is a state indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game state, and an ordinary symbol by controlling two LEDs to blink based on the ordinary symbol lottery result that is drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate 63. After the variable display, these two LEDs are normally displayed in the lighting mode according to the normal symbol lottery result, and the start condition of the variable display among the variable display of the normal symbols related to the passage of the game ball to the gate 63 Normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds, which is the number of variable displays that have not been established, and the first lottery drawn by receiving a game ball into the first starting opening 61 (occurrence of a start winning). Based on the result of the special lottery, the eight LEDs are variably displayed by controlling the blinking of the eight LEDs, and then these eight LEDs are responded to the result of the first special lottery. The first special symbol display to be displayed in the lighting mode and the variation display of the variation display of the first special symbol relating to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 61, which is not yet satisfied with the variation display start condition. Based on the first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings, and the second special lottery result that has been drawn by accepting game balls into the second starting opening (starting winning occurrence) A second special symbol display device for displaying these eight LEDs in a lighting mode corresponding to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs, and to the second starting opening A second special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbols relating to the acceptance of the game balls. , 1st special lottery result Comprises a second special lottery when the result such as "big hit", the round indicator consisting of four LED for displaying the number of repetitions of opening and closing patterns of the special winning opening (round number). The function display unit 100c can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on / off, blinking, and the like of LEDs.

  The peripheral control unit 5c is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 70, and controls the effects (e.g., light emission effect, sound effect, and movable effect) presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 100. A board 200 and an image control board 300 for controlling image display and sound output according to game development are provided (see FIG. 24). The liquid crystal display device 70 is located in the center of the game area 5a, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the liquid crystal base 300m that houses the back unit 200m. The liquid crystal display device 70 can be seen from the front through the frame of the frame-shaped center ornament 22 with the game board 5 assembled. The liquid crystal display device 70 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and displays a still image or a moving image. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 are described as being configured by being divided into two boards, but the functional configuration of the CPU of each board is not limited to the above. It may be appropriately changeable (for example, the CPU of the effect control board performs sound control) or the CPU on one board may control all the effects.

  The liquid crystal display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol and a notice effect which are displayed in a variable manner and stop in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, the decorative symbol display unit for performing variable display of the decorative symbol and the notice effect display, and the first special symbol hold lamp are held in synchronization with the first special symbol hold lamp. The 1st special figure reservation display section where the display is executed, and the 2nd special figure reservation display section where the reservation display of the 2nd special design is executed in synchronization with the 2nd special figure reservation lamp, are provided.

  In the decorative pattern display portion of the liquid crystal display screen, three columns of display areas (left display area, middle display area, right display area) that are variable display areas of the decorative pattern are provided on a predetermined effective line, The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display region, the medium symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region are stopped and displayed. In the normal display mode, the special image hold display section displays a hold image of a white circle when an operation hold ball of a special symbol occurs, while the corresponding hold image disappears when the operation hold ball is exhausted. It This reserved image is displayed in a predetermined order, such as the type of operation-holding balls of special symbols and the order in which they occur (the order in which they enter the ball), and it is possible to display a maximum of four on each special-character holding display section. is there.

<Change settings>
It is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can have a setting changing function that changes the degree of advantage of the game for the player by setting values in multiple stages. Here, the set value is a value for designating the degree of advantage of the game to the player, and is managed by the main control board 100 (see FIG. 24). In this example, it is assumed that six setting values of “setting 1”, “setting 2”, ..., “Setting 5”, and “setting 6” are prepared in order from the one having the lowest advantage degree. In order to change the degree of advantage of the game to the player depending on each set value, for example, it is conceivable to provide a difference in the jackpot probability or probability variation performance of the special symbol lottery for each set value. The main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the set value, and when the set value is changed by the setting change operation described later, controls the progress of the game based on the changed set value.

  Therefore, in the following, features of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment having the setting changing function will be described in detail. In the following description, changing / setting a set value is referred to as “setting change”, and a series of operations related to setting change is referred to as “setting change operation”.

  In the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, first, an operation for shifting the internal state controlled by the main control board 100 (main control CPU 101) to a “setting change state” in which a set value can be changed is performed, and thereafter. By performing an operation of selecting and setting a desired set value (a known operation method in a conventional gaming machine can be used, detailed description thereof is omitted) while being controlled to a setting change state , The setting value can be changed.

  The operation for shifting to the setting change state is the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 (frame opening) and the second procedure of turning the setting key switch on (setting key switch on). , A third procedure for performing an initialization operation on the initialization switch (RAM clear switch ON), and a fourth procedure for performing a power ON operation on the power switch (power switch ON). However, the third procedure and the fourth procedure must be operated in parallel.

  These first to fourth procedures will be described in detail with reference to the characteristic structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  In the first procedure (opening the frame), the operation of opening the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 using the door key is performed. The door key is also called a common key, and is generally not unique to each maker or model of gaming machines, and a key that can be shared with other gaming machines is used so that it can be easily operated in a gaming store.

  The procedure for opening the frame will be described in more detail. For example, by inserting a door key into a key hole (not shown) of a locking device that holds the front frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and rotating the door key in a predetermined direction, the front frame 4 is brought to the front. The front frame 4 can be released from the outer frame 2 by pulling. The keyhole into which the door key is inserted to open the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 may have a structure in which the keyhole of the locking device 3c that holds the closed state of the glass frame 3 with respect to the front frame 4 is shared.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a door opening sensor 2p is provided on the curtain plate portion of the outer frame 2 in order to detect the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and further corresponds to the door opening sensor 2p of the front frame 4. A door opening detection member 4p is provided at the position. For example, when the front frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door opening detection member 4p is fitted into the door opening sensor 2p so that the door opening sensor 2p closes the front frame 4 (door Closed). On the other hand, when the front frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the door open sensor 2p moves away from the door open sensor 2p, so that the door open sensor 2p opens the front frame 4 (door open). To detect. The information detected by the door open sensor 2p is output to a predetermined board or the like, and is processed as an error if necessary. The above structure is an example of a mechanism for detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and may be realized by another known mechanism.

  FIG. 15 is a rear view (No. 1) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 before the frame is opened, but when the outer frame 2 is removed from FIG. 15, the front frame 4 is opened (frame opened) with respect to the outer frame 2. Corresponds to a rear view of the front frame 4 of FIG. According to FIG. 15, on the back side of the front frame 4, the back cover 4h covering the rear side of the game board 5 is in a closed state. The back cover 4h is a covering member that normally covers the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (production control board 200). Therefore, even if the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 is performed, these covered units cannot be touched as long as the back cover 4h is in the closed state.

  15, the RAM clear switch cover 400p provided on the payout control board 400 (payout control unit) to cover the RAM clear switch 400q and the power supply board 600 (power supply unit) to cover the power switch 600q. The power switch cover 600p is shown, but details of these will be described later.

  Next, in the second procedure (setting key switch on), the setting key switch 100q is turned on using the setting key. Unlike the above-mentioned door key, the setting key is a key unique to each maker (or model) of the gaming machine from the viewpoint of security in order to prevent fraud regarding “setting” that greatly affects the gaming machine performance. Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key switch 100q is provided on the main control unit 5b (for example, the main control board 100). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, by simply opening the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 in the first procedure, the main control unit 5b is covered with the back cover 4h, and thus the setting key switch 100q. The setting key cannot be inserted into. Therefore, when performing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the back cover 4h.

  FIG. 16 is a rear view (No. 2) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 with the back cover 4h removed from FIG. 15, and when the outer frame 2 is removed from FIG. 16, when the second procedure is executed (that is, the front frame 4 is opened). And the rear cover 4h is opened). According to FIG. 16, the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200) that were covered by the back cover 4h are exposed. However, the setting key switch 100q has not yet appeared in the visible position.

  In the present embodiment, the back surface of the main control unit 5b is covered with the main control board case 100n, and the portion where the setting key switch 100q is provided is normally covered with the openable / closable harness cover 100p. That is, the setting key switch 100q is normally doubly covered by the back cover 4h and the harness cover 100p, and when executing the second procedure, it is necessary to further open the harness cover 100p after opening the back cover 4h. There is. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the back cover 4h has a structure that opens and closes in the left-right direction, whereas the harness cover 100p has a structure that opens and closes in the up-down direction. By making the opening and closing directions of both covers different as described above, it is difficult to operate the setting key switch 100q through the gap in the state where the front frame 4 is opened small, and the crime prevention property can be improved.

  FIG. 17 is a rear view (No. 3) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the harness cover 100p is opened from the state shown in FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the harness cover 100p is opened to the rear side of the front frame 4, the setting key switch 100q provided at the back of the harness cover 100p is operably exposed.

  Therefore, at this time, the operator of the setting change operation (for example, the hall manager) inserts the corresponding setting key into the setting key switch 100q from the rear side of the front frame 4 with the harness cover 100p open, and sets the predetermined value. The second procedure for turning on the setting key switch 100q can be executed by performing an operation such as turning in the direction.

  17 and 18 also show a state in which the RAM clear switch cover 400p provided in the payout control unit and the power switch cover 600p provided in the power supply unit are opened.

  The RAM clear switch cover 400p is a cover that swings and opens and closes in the vertical direction. For example, the RAM clear switch cover 400p has a lock mechanism in a closed state, and after the RAM clear switch cover 400p is once unlocked by moving the RAM clear switch cover 400p downward, it can be opened to the front side. Then, when the RAM clear switch cover 400p is opened, the RAM clear switch 400q is operably exposed.

  The RAM clear switch 400q corresponds to the initialization switch operated in the third procedure, and performs a predetermined initialization operation (for example, an ON operation by pressing the RAM clear switch 400q within a predetermined period after power-on). In the case of being broken, a signal for initializing (RAM clear) the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 is output. The initialization operation for clearing the RAM is not limited to the single operation of the RAM clear switch 400q, but the RAM clear switch 400q may be pressed to turn on the power switch 600q to clear the RAM. The initialization operation may be performed. Further, the range of information initialized when the RAM clear is executed is not limited to the control information stored in the main control RAM 103.

  Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator who performs the setting change operation initializes the RAM clear switch 400q from the rear side of the front frame 4 with the RAM clear switch cover 400p opened (for example, By performing the ON operation), the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) can be executed.

  The power switch cover 600p is a cover that swings and opens / closes in the vertical direction, like the RAM clear switch cover 400p described above. The power switch cover 600p may also have a lock mechanism. When the power switch cover 600p is opened, the power switch 600q is operably exposed.

  The power switch 600q is a power switch that changes the power supply state of the gaming machine 1 (at least the main control board 100), and outputs a signal that switches the power on / off state when a power operation is performed. .

  Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator of the setting change operation performs a predetermined power operation (power-on) on the power switch 600q from the rear side of the front frame 4 with the power switch cover 600p opened. By performing the operation), the fourth procedure (power switch on) can be executed. Note that, as described above, the third procedure and the fourth procedure must be operated simultaneously (in parallel) in parallel. Then, by performing the first to fourth procedures, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the setting change state, and it becomes possible to select and set the set value.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first procedure (opening the frame) and the second procedure (setting key switch) among the first to fourth procedures for shifting to the setting change state described above. If ON) is omitted and executed, the initialization operation is performed, and if the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) is omitted and executed, setting for confirming the current game setting (setting value) Move to the confirmation state.

  As described above, in the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, the second to fourth steps must be executed from the rear side of the front frame 4 with the outer frame 2 opening the front frame 4 by the first procedure. Since it cannot be done, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent attempt to change the setting while the front door (front frame 4) of the gaming machine is closed.

<Board surface configuration>
FIG. 19 is a front view of a game board having a board surface configuration suitable for this embodiment. The game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 is an example of a game board forming a board surface configuration suitable for this embodiment. Therefore, in the subsequent embodiments, the game board 5 (see FIG. 8) that has been used as the game board of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is replaced with the game board 5A shown in FIG. The same components as those of the game board 5 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As a main feature of the pachinko machine 1 suitable for the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 uses a drum-type effect display device 71 instead of the liquid crystal display device 70 as an effect display device for displaying a decorative pattern or effect image. . Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5A, the reserved display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol which are displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol reservation lamp 173 and the second special symbol reservation lamp 174, This is performed by the hold display LED 75 instead of the liquid crystal display device 70.

  According to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, a drum type effect display device 71 is arranged in an opening near the center of the game area 5a. Further, in front of the drum type effect display device 71 (on the side of the glass plate of the glass frame 3), a light guide plate 72 having transparency when not emitting light is arranged at a position covering a part of the display by the drum type effect display device. Has been done. The display mode by the drum type effect display device 71 and the light guide plate 72 can be visually recognized by the player through the display area (symbol display area 710).

  Further, according to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, a sub effect display device 73 is arranged on the right side of the drum type effect display device 71. Further, below the sub effect display device 73, a segment effect display device 74 configured by three segment display devices is arranged.

  Further, according to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, a hold display LED 75 composed of eight single-color LEDs is arranged below the opening where the drum type effect display device 71 is arranged. An expectation level display LED 76, which is a full-color LED, is arranged near the center below the hold display LED 75.

  These configurations arranged on the game board 5A will be described in detail below.

<Drum type display device>
The drum-type effect display device 71 is a display device that uses a rotating drum (a reel 711 described later), and in the symbol display area 710, mainly variable display / stop in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the decorative pattern and the effect image including the notice effect are displayed. A belt type reel or the like may be used instead of the rotating drum.

  A light guide plate 72 is arranged in front of the rotary drum of the drum type effect display device 71. Although the details will be described later, the light guide plate 72 is a display device capable of displaying a predetermined decorative symbol in a part of the symbol display area 710 by surface-emission at the time of performing a specific effect, and the drum-type effect display device 71. When is regarded as the main decorative symbol display device, the light guide plate 72 has a function as a sub decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the symbol display area. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an arrangement and symbols of reels. First, the drum type effect display device 71 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

  The drum-type effect display device 71 includes three rotatable reels 711 (individually, the left reel 711a, the middle reel 711b, and the right reel 711c), a stepping motor that gives a driving force to each reel 711, and a symbol display. A backlight (not shown) capable of irradiating the surface of each reel 711 in the area 710 is provided.

  The reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, right reel 711c) is a rotary drum having a plurality of kinds of identification information (decorative patterns) drawn on its outer periphery, and is associated with the operation of the stepping motor. By rotating and stopping, the decorative display is variably displayed in the design display area 710.

  The stepping motor of the reel 711 has a drive current switched on / off by a motor driver 92 (see FIG. 24), and the motor driver 92 is based on a drive control signal transmitted from the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201). Controlled.

  That is, in short, the operation of the drum type effect display device 71 (reel 711) is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). More specifically, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) is a drum effect effect display device based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined by the main control board 100 (main control CPU 101). The variation pattern of the symbol (decorative symbol) to be displayed is determined by 71, and a reel control operation corresponding to the determined variation pattern is instructed to the motor driver 92 by transmitting a drive control signal. Then, the motor driver 92 operates the stepping motor according to the received drive control signal, whereby each reel 711 is rotated / stopped at a desired timing, so that the desired symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display area 710.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, 12 symbols are arranged on each reel 711. Then, as shown in FIG. 20, in the symbol display area 710, display areas for three columns (left column, middle column, right column) corresponding to the reels 711a to 711c are secured, and the maximum in each column. You can display three consecutive symbols (upper, middle, lower). That is, in the symbol display area 710, a maximum of 3 symbols in the vertical direction and 3 symbols in the horizontal direction, that is, a total of 9 symbols can be displayed. After that, the display position of the symbol in the symbol display area 710 is indicated by a combination of columns and columns. Specifically, for example, the upper stage of the left column is referred to as the "upper left stage", the middle stage of the middle column is referred to as the "middle middle stage", and the lower stage of the right column is referred to as the "lower right stage".

  Here, the reel arrangement shown in FIG. 21 will be described in detail. According to FIG. 21, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on each reel 711. For example, in the left reel 711a, symbols imitating "7" are arranged at numbers 7, 9, and 10, and these are referred to as "7 symbols". Further, in the left reel 711a, the patterns that imitate different dinosaurs are arranged at numbers 3, 5, and 6, and these are sequentially named "Dinosaur A symbol", "Dinosaur symbol B", and "Dinosaur symbol C". ". Further, in the left reel 711a, symbols 0 to 2 are arranged over three consecutive frames and imitating a part of a large dinosaur. These are collectively referred to as the "great dinosaur symbol" for the three frames. Further, the symbols arranged in the fourth, eighth, and eleventh numbers on the left reel 711a are symbols that mean detachment, and are referred to as "blank symbols".

  Similarly, when confirming the reel arrangement of the middle reel 711b and the right reel 711c shown in FIG. 21, the above “7 symbol”, “dinosaur A symbol”, “dinosaur B symbol”, and “dinosaur C symbol” are It can be seen that at least one or more are arranged on all reels 711. Further, regarding the "great dinosaur symbol", although the respective symbols are different depending on the reels 711, symbols arranged in three consecutive frames 1 to 3 on the middle reel 711b and 3 to the right reel 711c. The symbols arranged in No. 5 in three consecutive frames are collectively referred to as a "great dinosaur symbol". That is, according to FIG. 21, on each reel 711, one or more symbols of a plurality of types are arranged at least for each type.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the symbols of the same type are stopped and displayed in a line in the symbol display area 710 due to the fluctuation stop of the reel 711, the lottery of the special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) It is notified (or suggested) that the result is a hit (not only a big hit but also a small hit, etc. may be included). However, as described above, since the "blank symbol" is a symbol that means a deviation, even if the blank symbol stops in a line, it does not notify the hit. In addition, about the arrangement of one row by "the great dinosaur symbol", the "great dinosaur symbol" that extends over three frames of each column should be displayed in all the columns (that is, all the nine symbols in the symbol display area 710 are the large dinosaur symbol) Will be stopped).

  Further, in the case of the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 21, there is no one in which three symbols of the same type are continuously arranged in one reel. Therefore, when the symbols of the same kind are lined up in a line only with the symbols on the reels 711, the symbols do not stop in the vertical line, and the three horizontal lines (horizontal line) in the horizontal direction are surely spanned over the three rows of the reels 711. , The middle line, the lower line) or two diagonal lines in the diagonal direction (upward right line, downward right line).

  However, the symbol array of the reel 711 in the present embodiment is not limited to the example of FIG. Therefore, for example, the middle 9th blank symbol may be changed to 7 symbols, and in this case, when the 8th to 10th symbols are stopped in the symbol display area 710 when the medium reel 711b is stopped. The 7 symbols are arranged in a line on the vertical line (middle line) in the vertical direction, and the hit can be notified only by one reel 711b.

  Further, in the drum type effect display device 71 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the background of the symbol attached to each reel 711 is black (or a color having a high absorption rate close to black). Although it is generally called a black reel, by making the reel 711 a black reel, it is possible to enhance the visibility of the display pattern of the light guide plate 72 when a pattern display by light emission of the light guide plate 72 described later is performed. . Furthermore, the combination of the symbol display by the reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 and the symbol display by the light guide plate 72 is combined to reduce the discomfort felt by the player with respect to the overall symbol display in the symbol display area 710. It can be expected to enhance the effect. In addition, the visibility and the effect described above can be further enhanced by making the space between and around each reel 711 in the drum type effect display device 71 black (or a color having a high absorption rate close to black).

<Light guide plate>
Next, the light guide plate 72 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  The light guide plate 72 is a display device that emits light from a predetermined display surface (also referred to as a light emitting region) when light is input from a light source such as an LED provided on an end face thereof, and displays a preprinted image by light emission. The light emission display by the light guide plate 72 is controlled by, for example, the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201). In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 72 serves as a sub-decorative symbol display device for the main decorative symbol display device (drum-type effect display device 71), and is a specific type of symbol among the symbols that can be displayed by the main decorative symbol display device ( In this example, the "7 symbols") are configured to be capable of being light-emitted.

  The light guide plate 72 is maintained in a transmissive state at a normal time when light is not emitted, so that the visibility for the display effect by the drum type effect display device 71 arranged on the back side is not impaired, and at this time, the symbol display area. All of the symbols displayed by the reels 711 in 710 can be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, at the time of executing a specific effect, the light guide plate 72 displays a predetermined image in a predetermined light emitting area in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the content of the effect, under the control of the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201).

  Specifically, in the light guide plate 72 shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the symbol display area 710 having a display area of up to 9 frames, a light emitting area 721 is formed at a position covering the display area of 7 frames. . Explaining in detail for each frame, the light emitting areas 721a to 721c are formed in the upper, middle and lower rows of the left column, the light emitting areas 721d are formed in the middle of the middle row, and the light emitting areas 721e to 721g are formed in the upper, middle and lower rows of the right row. Are formed. The light emitting area 721a located in the upper row of the left column, the light emitting area 721e located in the upper row of the right column, the light emitting area 721c located in the lower row of the left column, and the light emitting area 721g located in the lower row of the right column are respectively light guide plates. Light can be emitted by irradiating light from a light source provided on the upper stage or the lower stage of the left end face or the right end face of 72. The light emitting areas 721b, 721d, 721f located in the middle row can be made to emit light by irradiating light from a light source provided on the upper end surface or the lower end surface of each reel.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20, in each of the light emitting areas 721a to 721g, as a "specific type of symbol" among the symbols that can be displayed by the drum-type effect display device 71, "7 symbol" of the reel 711 ( Seven patterns of the same type as those shown in FIG. 21) are printed. The 7 patterns of the light guide plate 72 may have the same design as the 7 patterns of the reel 711, or may be such that the player can recognize that it is the same type of the 7 patterns of the reel 711. Or, as long as it has the same role as the 7 symbols of the reel 711, the design may be partially or entirely different.

  When the light guide plate 72 emits light, in order to improve the visibility and the distinctiveness of the light emitting pattern in the light emitting area 721, for example, based on the control by the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201), the drum type production display device 71. It is preferable that the backlight for irradiating the reel 711 is partially extinguished or all extinguished.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has such a light guide plate 72 in the symbol display area 710 in front of the reel 711 of the drum-type effect display device 71, so that the symbol by the reel 711 is executed when a specific effect is executed. The seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 can be displayed in a light emitting manner in a manner of covering the display, and the notification of the hit by the seven symbols can be realized in various variations.

  As a specific example of the notification using the 7 patterns of the light guide plate 72, for example, by causing the light emitting regions 721a to 721c to emit light, a line of 7 patterns can be formed with only the 7 patterns of the light guide plate 72. Further, for example, a line of 7 symbols can be formed by combining 7 symbols of the reel 711 and 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72. Specifically, for example, in the symbol display area 710, the left reels 711a have numbers 9 to 7 stopped, the middle column have numbers 7 to 5 stopped, and the right column have right reels 711c numbered 9 to 7. When No. 7 is stopped (a double tempai with 7 symbols in the left and right rows, but the 6th dinosaur C symbol is stopped in the middle row in the middle row and is missing), the light emitting area 721d is emitted. By doing so, the seven symbols are displayed in a manner of covering the dinosaur C symbol in the middle and middle tiers, so that the line of seven symbols can be formed by the two lines of the downward line and the upward right line.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with such a light guide plate 72, and effects related to the variable display of the decorative symbol performed by controlling the drum type effect display device 71 (reel 711) (including the notice effect). As a part of the above), by executing a specific effect using the light emission of the light guide plate 72, the hit is notified in a manner that cannot be displayed only by the reel 711 or in a manner that the symbol display by the reel 711 is overridden. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of game effects and to expect an effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

  In the present embodiment, it is preferable that the symbols (seven symbols in this example) that can be displayed on the light guide plate 72 give a relatively advantageous privilege when the notification is given by the arrangement of the symbols. More specifically, for example, when the arrangement of monsters suggests hits for two or more rounds, whereas the arrangement of seven designs suggests hits for five or more rounds, seven designs are used for the light-emission patterns of the light guide plate 72. In this way, it is possible to use a symbol having a high degree of advantage of the privilege obtained by winning. Further, for example, when the arrangement of monster symbols suggests a normal hit, whereas when the arrangement of 7 symbols suggests a probability variation hit, 7 symbols are used for the light-emission pattern of the light guide plate 72. It is conceivable to use a symbol with a high degree of advantage of the privilege obtained by a series of advantageous games involved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols that can be displayed on the light guide plate 72 (7 symbols in this example) may be expected to be relatively advantageous benefits depending on the number of lines formed by the symbols. Specifically, for example, when 7 patterns form one line, it suggests a win of 5 rounds or more, whereas when 2 lines or more are formed, a win of 10 rounds or more is confirmed. When a line is formed (the maximum number of lines in this example, and when 7 symbols are stopped in all the frames in the symbol display area 710), a certain variation of 10 rounds is confirmed. When it is possible, it is preferable to adopt 7 patterns as the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate 72.

  Further, the symbols that can be displayed in a plurality of lines described in the previous stage (7 symbols in this example), in the symbol display area 710, so that the reels 711 can display a plurality of the symbols in at least one column or more, It is preferable that a plurality of the symbols are arranged on the reel 711. In the case of FIG. 21, the 10th to 7th arrays of the left reel 711a, the 10th to 6th arrays of the middle reel 711b, and the 10th to 7th arrays of the right reel 711c satisfy this condition.

  Then, when a highly advantageous design is used for the light-emitting design of the light guide plate 72 as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment controls the drum-type effect display device 71 (reel 711) to be a decorative design. By executing a specific effect that uses the light emission of the light guide plate 72 as a part of the effect (which may include a notice effect) related to the variable display, by executing a specific effect that uses the light emission of the light guide plate 72. , 7 symbols can be expected to be stopped in a plurality of lines, so that an effect of further enhancing the interest of the player can be expected.

  Regarding the specific effect that uses the light emission of the light guide plate 72 as a part of the effect relating to the variable display of the decorative pattern performed by controlling the drum type effect display device 71 (reel 711), "roulette reach effect" and " A detailed example will be given in "Seven reach production" and "Vision opportunity production".

  In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 72 may be an optical device capable of switching between a transmissive state (normal time) and a state in which a specific image is displayed (in a specific effect), and further, For example, a plurality of types of optical devices may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light guide plates may be arranged in a stacked manner, or, for example, a device that emits light with different optical characteristics by applying a substantially transparent excitation paint (paint that is emitted by a black light) to the back surface of the light guide plate. May be

  Further, in the present embodiment, the position where the light guide plate 72 is arranged is not limited to the above-described light emitting areas 721a to 721g, and a frame on which the symbols are displayed by the reel 711 in the symbol display area 710 (a maximum of 9 in this example). Out of the frames), any position may be arranged as long as it covers at least one of the frames.

<Sub effect display device (4th reel)>
The sub effect display device 73 will be described in detail. The sub effect display device 73 is an effect display device that is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and is used for variable display of decorative symbols by the drum type effect display device 71 (or the liquid crystal display device 70). It can be used for interlocking productions, advance notice productions, and the like. In the case of FIG. 19, the sub effect display device 73 is arranged on the right side of the drum type effect display device 71, but the arrangement place thereof is not particularly limited in the pachinko machine 1 and can be visually recognized by the player (in normal time, It can be arranged at any position (including the case where it is covered with an accessory and is exposed in a specific situation).

  Further, the sub effect display device 73 may be a liquid crystal display device which displays an image on a liquid crystal screen, or a drum type effect display device which displays a pattern by using a rotating drum (reel) or the like with a pattern. May be In the present example, the sub effect display device 73 is described as an image display on the liquid crystal screen, imitating a mode of a rotatable reel provided with a predetermined pattern (icon). According to the image display by the sub effect display device 73 of this example, it is possible to provide a reel effect in which the fourth reel (4th reel) is felt in addition to the three reels 711 by the drum effect display device 71. Therefore, the sub effect display device 73 is also referred to as a "4th reel 73".

  FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon that can be displayed by the sub effect display device. In FIG. 22, array numbers (0 to 11) when viewed as a 4th reel, pattern numbers (1 to 5) for identifying each icon, names of each icon, and correspondences to each pattern Are summarized.

  It is assumed that the sub effect display device 73 of this example has a display area for two frames (two array numbers), and as shown in FIG. 22, each icon extends over two frames (two array numbers). It is arranged. The array number 0 means the initial position of the 4th reel 73. Specifically, when the power is turned on or when the normal display is restored after the performance is finished, the array number 0 is displayed in the upper frame of the display area. It is controlled so as to be positioned (that is, the “title” picture with the picture number 1 is displayed in the entire display area). The “title” pattern with the pattern number 1 is an icon that is normally displayed and has no special meaning due to the display.

  The sub effect display device 73 can suggest the degree of expectation or request a predetermined operation by giving each icon a meaning and performing an effect of changing the icon displayed in the display area. A specific example will be described below.

  The "approaching" pattern with the pattern number 2 and the "vibrating" pattern with the pattern number 3 suggest that the highly-expected pattern fluctuations and effects are approaching. Of these, if the "vibration" symbol means that the fluctuation or effect of the target is closer than the "approaching" symbol, for example, the "approach" symbol is displayed as a notice effect by pre-reading, and then the pre-reading target fluctuation starts. It can be used to display a "quake" pattern when performing a pre-reading change.

  The “repeatedly hitting” picture pattern with the picture number 4 is an icon for requesting a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 3j. Further, the "hard push" picture of the picture number 7 is an icon requesting a pressing operation of the effect button 3j or a pulling operation of the second effect button 3k. Note that, as shown in FIG. 22, the “continuous hitting” pattern and the “hard pressing” pattern are both assigned to array numbers 5 to 6. This means that in the display of the 4th reel 73, both patterns can be appropriately replaced and displayed. Then, for example, if an operation with a higher degree of expectation is required for a “hard press” pattern than for a “continuous hit” pattern, it is possible to make the player have a strong interest in which pattern is displayed. it can.

  The “CANCE” picture with the picture number 5 and the “Baku” picture with the picture number 6 suggest that the situation or situation is high in expectations. If the "explosion" design means a higher degree of expectation than the "CHANCE" design, for example, when the "CHANCE" design is displayed, the player should change to the "explosion" design one step ahead. Can be expected.

  Note that these are merely examples, and the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may prepare various other icons for the sub effect display device 73 and associate various meanings with each icon. it can.

  For example, the sub effect display device 73 may display a compensation value such as “× 1”, “× 2”, and “× 3”. In this case, an effect in which the privilege content notified by the drum type effect display device 71 (or the liquid crystal display device 70) or the like is changed according to the display content of the consideration display is conceivable. Specifically, by displaying "x2" on the sub effect display device 73 when the number of rounds for the big hit is reported as "5R", the number of rounds is doubled to "10R". The performance can be executed. Further, by displaying "× 3" by the sub effect display device 73 when the number of times saved is "50 times", an effect that the number of rounds is tripled to "150 times" is executed. can do.

  Further, the sub effect display device 73 may perform a display suggesting the type of special game, for example. Specifically, immediately before or after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "normal" beside the line in which symbols corresponding to the special game such as 7 symbols are lined up (hereinafter, also referred to as "prize winning line") Alternatively, it is possible to perform an effect such as “probability change” in which the type of special game acquired at that time is displayed by the sub effect display device 73.

  Further, the sub effect display device 73, for example, when the small hitting RUSH function is installed in the pachinko machine 1, according to the small hitting pattern in which the number of times of opening the special winning opening is different, the display line of the small hitting symbol at that time is displayed. You may make it display which suggests the number of times the special winning opening is opened. On the contrary, the sub effect display device 73 displays a plurality of types of opening numbers of the special winning opening such as “1 time”, “3 times”, and “5 times”, and the small hit symbol is stopped at the corresponding line. May be.

  Further, the drum-type effect display device 71 pre-reads and responds in accordance with the display content (for example, awarding point display) of the sub effect display device located on the extension of the line at which the chance stops at the temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation. Addition of points, in the case of variable display of decorative patterns with high expectation that hits such as reach effect occur, depending on the amount of points accumulated up to that point, the winning branch expectation degree is displayed on the sub effect display device 73. It may be displayed.

  Further, as a pattern of the sub effect display device 73, a pattern simulating a bomb (hereinafter, referred to as “bomb pattern”) and a pattern in which the bomb explodes (hereinafter referred to as “explosion pattern”) are prepared, and the sub effect display device 73 is provided. When is stopped by the bomb pattern, an effect of counting down from a predetermined value may be performed on a segment effect display device 74 (FIG. 19) described later. In this case, when the count becomes "0", the display design of the sub effect display device 73 is switched from the bomb design to the explosion design, and the chances of increasing chances such as continuous pseudo fluctuation and development to super reach are reached. May be obtained.

<Segment display device>
The segment effect display device 74 is composed of three segment displays and can display three-digit alphanumeric characters and symbols. The segment indicators are referred to as segments 741a to 741c in order from the left in FIG. 19, and lighting of the segments 741a to 741c is controlled by, for example, the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201).

  In the case of FIG. 19, since the segment 741a is composed of two segments in total in one column in the vertical direction, only “1” can be displayed when displaying a number. On the other hand, the segments 741b and 741c are so-called "7-segment", which is composed of two segments in the vertical two rows and one in the horizontal three rows, which is a so-called "7 segment", and is from "0" to "9". The number of can be displayed. From the above, the segment display device 74 shown in FIG. 19 can display the numbers “00” to “100” using the segments 741a to 741c. These numerical displays are used, for example, to display the number of remaining games (or cumulative number of games) in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, or to display the current number of rounds during the jackpot game (cumulative number of rounds display). In addition to the above, it is conceivable that, for the effect display that is changing, an expectation level display effect that indicates the expected value of the big hit is displayed. However, as described above, the display by the segment effect display device 74 is not limited to numbers, and can be used for other effect displays and the like.

  The configuration of the segment effect display device 74 in the present embodiment is not limited to the above example. For example, each of the segments 741a to 741c may be capable of changing the emission color, may be a segmented display with dots, or may be a segmented display having another number of segments. Further, the number of segment displays constituting the segment effect display device 74 is not limited to a specific number. Further, the display control executed by using the segment effect display device 74 is performed by a display device other than the segment display (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp provided near or inside the operation button, a lamp on the board, a frame). Lamp or the like).

  The details will be described with reference to a specific example in “Player operation input effect” which will be described later. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a display by the segment effect display device 74 is used for effect display and It is possible to notify the player of the effective period (operation effective period) of the effect button operation and the like.

<Hold display LED>
The hold display LED 75 is a display for performing a hold display of a special symbol, and a first hold display LED 751 and a second special display LED 751 that are lit in synchronization with a first special symbol hold lamp 173 indicating a hold state of the first special symbol. A second hold display LED 752 that lights up in synchronization with a second special figure hold lamp 174 that shows the holding state of the symbol, and is configured (see FIG. 23). The hold display LED 75 is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201).

  As shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, the first hold display LED 751 is composed of a plurality of single-color LEDs corresponding to the maximum hold number (four in this example) of the first special symbol. The first hold display LEDs 751a to 751d are composed of four single-color LEDs corresponding to ascending order. The second hold display LED 752 is composed of a plurality of single-color LEDs corresponding to the maximum hold number (four in this example) of the second special symbol. Specifically, the second hold display LED 752 corresponds to the ascending order of the hold numbers. The hold display LEDs 752a to 752d are composed of four single-color LEDs.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since the 1st hold | maintenance display LED751 and the 2nd hold | maintenance display LED752 are comprised by monochrome LED, change production of a hold color cannot be performed. However, in the display control indicating the hold state, a change effect of the light emission mode such as switching between lighting and blinking can be executed, and in addition, only the hold display LED 75 to be changed changes the physical arrangement relationship (for example, a slightly raised position. It is also possible to show the change effect by a method such as moving to (1) so that they are not lined up horizontally, and a method combining these may be adopted. The colors of the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752 do not have to be the same.

<Expected degree display LED, nail accessory, small movable accessory>
FIG. 23 is an enlarged view around the expectation degree display LED. FIG. 23 (A) shows a state in which most of the expectation indicator LEDs 76 are visible (LED exposed state), and FIG. 23 (B) shows that they are covered with the closed nail accessory 77. A state (LED covering state) in which more than half of the expectation indicator LEDs 76 are invisible is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (A) and FIG. 23 (B), the expectation level display LED 76 is a display unit disposed below the middle of the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752, and has three internal With the configuration in which full-color LEDs are arranged, light emission is controlled by the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201). Since the expectation degree display LED 76 is required to be capable of emitting light in at least a plurality of colors, in order to perform more vivid light emitting display, a display such as a liquid crystal display device (so-called mini liquid crystal) is used instead of the full color LED. It may be.

  Further, a nail accessory 77 composed of three claw-shaped movable members is arranged on the outer edge of the expectation degree display LED 76. The nail accessory 77 is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and, for example, three claw-shaped movable members are arranged at the position (normal position) shown in FIG. 23 (A) and FIG. 23 (B). It is possible to move linearly between the position shown in () and the operating position. When the nail accessory 77 (three claw-shaped movable members) moves from the normal position to the operating position, the LED exposed state changes to the LED covered state, and the nail accessory 77 grabs the expectation display LED 76. To do.

  Note that the nail accessory 77 is not limited to the linear operation between the normal position and the operating position described above, but also a rotating operation in which three claw-shaped movable members rotate around the expectation degree display LED 76 and a nail operation. It is also possible to perform an operation in which the entire accessory 77 vibrates.

  On the left and right sides of the expectation display LED 76 and the nail role object 77, small movable role objects 78 (individually small movable role objects 78a, 78b) are arranged, each of which is composed of two movable role objects imitating a dinosaur. The small movable accessory objects 78a and 78b can be moved substantially left and right, and are controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). As shown by the arrow in FIG. 23 (B), the small movable accessory 78a, 78b is moved left and right, so that the expectation degree display LED 76 and the nail accessory 77 can be pushed.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the expectation suggesting effect that indicates the expectation of the current fluctuation (the concerned fluctuation) by using the expectation indicating LED 76 (the expectation suggesting effect of the concerned fluctuation). ). Specifically, when the production control board 200 (production control CPU 201) controls the variable display of the decorative pattern, by changing the emission color or the light emission mode of the expectation display LED 76, the degree of expectation for the current variation (the variation). Can be suggested. Specifically, for example, in a normal time when no particular expectation level is suggested, the expectation level display LED 76 is lit in white, and in a performance in which a high expectation level is suggested, the emission color of the expectation level display LED 76 is changed to green or red. , Make it blink.

  Further, the nail accessory 77 or the small movable accessory 78 may be interlocked with each other when the expectation suggesting effect of the variation using the expectation display LED 76 is executed. Specifically, for example, before changing the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76, the small movable accessory 78 is moved to the left and right to cause an action of poke the nail accessory 77 in the normal position, and further, the nail accessory. By moving the object 77 to the operating position to put it in the LED-covered state, the action of the nailed object 77 that has been caught grasps the expectation degree display LED 76. Then, the emission color of the expectancy display LED 76 is changed at the timing when the nail role object 77 grips the expectation level display LED 76, and then the nail role object 77 is returned to the normal position and the LED is exposed again. A product production can be considered.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests a predetermined expectation degree of the prefetch target hold (expectation degree suggesting effect of the prefetch target hold) using the expectation degree display LED 76. . More specifically, when the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) executes the read-ahead of the hold fluctuation and the hold fluctuation satisfying a predetermined condition is read ahead, the fluctuation display of the hold fluctuation (pre-read target hold) is performed. By changing the emission color or the light emission mode of the expectation degree display LED 76 at the previous timing, the expectation degree of the suspension change (prefetch target suspension) can be suggested in advance. Note that, similarly to the above-described expected change suggestion effect of the variation, the nail accessory 77 or the small movable accessory 78 may be interlocked with each other when the expectation suggestion effect of holding the prefetch target is executed.

<Game machine control configuration>
FIG. 24 is a control block diagram showing an example of the control configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 24, the main control board 100 includes a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, an I / O port circuit 104, and the like. The main control CPU 101 controls the operation of the main control program and executes various arithmetic processing relating to the game. The main control ROM 102 stores the main control program and various data in a non-volatile manner. The main control RAM 103 functions as a work area and a buffer memory used as a temporary storage area (temporary area). The I / O port circuit 104 inputs and outputs signals to and from peripheral boards such as the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400 and each device under the control of the main control CPU 101.

  The main control CPU 101 reads the main control program from the main control ROM 102 and executes each instruction on the main control RAM 103 to control the game operation according to each instruction of the main control program.

  Besides, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit, a WDT circuit, a CTC circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

  The clock circuit divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock. The WDT circuit resets the main control CPU 101 to a normal state when the main control CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. The CTC circuit generates a real-time interrupt and measures time. The random number generation circuit operates as a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main control CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). These are electrically connected to each other via an internal bus (not shown).

  The main control CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading the main control program stored in the main control ROM 102 and executing arithmetic processing based on the detection information from the switches 161 and the like.

  Further, the main control CPU 101, in addition to the effect command output port for outputting the effect control command for executing the effect operation accompanying the main control of the game to the effect control board 200, for executing the payout operation of the game ball. Is provided with a payout command output port for outputting the payout command, and further with a strobe signal output port used when outputting a strobe signal for timing when each of the transmission commands is received by the target substrate. . The main control CPU 101 has various other output ports, and the strobe signal output port 101B actually exists as a port for outputting a plurality of data including other output data.

  The main control RAM 103 is a volatile storage unit in which at least a part of the area is backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 600. The backup area of the main control RAM 103 is an area where the storage of the data such as the stack pointer and each register held when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as “power cutoff”) should be held. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was shut off based on the information in the backup area.

  The main control board 100 includes a setting key switch 100q for changing a set value, a first starting port switch 161 provided in the first starting port 61, a second starting port switch 162 provided in the second starting port 62, It is electrically connected to various switches such as an operation gate switch 163 provided at the gate 63, a special winning opening switch 164 provided at the special winning opening 64, and a general winning opening switch 166 provided at the general winning opening 66. ing. In the main control board 100, detection signals from these various switches are input to the main control CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104.

  Further, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 171, the second special symbol display device 172, the first special symbol holding lamp 173, the second special symbol holding lamp 174, the normal symbol display device 175, and the general symbol holding lamp. It is electrically connected to various display means such as 176. The main control board 100 is electrically connected to various solenoids such as a normal electric auditors product solenoid 123 that operates the normal electric auditors product 622 and a special electric auditors product solenoid 124 that operates the special electric auditors product 642. Control signals from the main control CPU 101 are transmitted to these various display means and various solenoids via the I / O port circuit 104.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by, for example, eight parallel signal lines and one strobe signal line, and a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Communication is possible only by itself. That is, while it is allowed to transmit various performance control commands from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, it is not allowed to transmit commands or data from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100. .

  The I / O port circuit 104 is provided in the main control board 100 between the main control CPU 101 and the effect control board connection connector 109. The main control CPU 101 and the production control board connection connector 109 are connected by a strobe signal bus 112 formed by strobe signal lines, in addition to the data bus 111 formed by eight data lines. The command data transmitted from the I / O port circuit 104 is received by the production control board 200 via the production control board connection connector 109 under the control of the main control CPU 101 as described later.

<Production control board>
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the effect control board 200 stores the effect control CPU 201 that executes various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, the effect control program and various data. Between the production control ROM 202, the production control RAM 203 functioning as a work area and a buffer memory as a temporary work area (temporary area), and peripheral boards and devices such as the main control board 100 and the image control board 300. An I / O port circuit 204 for inputting / outputting a signal is provided.

  The effect control CPU201 reads the effect control program stored in the effect control ROM202 and executes it on the effect control RAM203 to control the effect operation accompanying the progress of the game according to this effect control program. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the production control board 200 is reset by a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and when the production control CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. WDT circuit for returning to a normal state by TPU circuit, TPU circuit for outputting various signals based on system clock, interrupt controller for generating various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from register setting and CTC circuit, serial data input / output A serial communication circuit for doing so, a real-time clock circuit (hereinafter referred to as “RTC circuit”) having a time counting function, and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 generates an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to output an image and a sound in the effect control process according to the effect control command from the main control board 100, and also, the lamp connection. A lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the substrate 91, a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 such that bidirectional communication is possible. An image control command related to an image and a sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response, a response command (so-called ACK command) indicating that the image control command is normally received. Is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is connected to the speaker 11 that outputs sound, and the effect control CPU 201 performs control to output the sound data generated by the image control board 300 to the speaker 11.

  The production control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 having a plurality of LED drivers mounted thereon, and outputs a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In the present embodiment, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronous serial communication and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal.

  The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200. The lamp connection board 91 turns on / off the switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal to supply or cut off the drive current to the effect lamps 10 and 25 to turn on or off the effect lamps 10 and 25. Perform control such as

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for driving the accessory to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Output. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory by turning on / off a switch in the circuit based on a drive control signal for driving the accessory that is transmitted from the effect control board 200. Each movable accessory is operated by turning on or off. A parallel communication method is used for data transmission to the motor driver 92. Not limited to this embodiment, if a driving source other than the stepping motor is used as the driving source of the accessory, a control signal or a driving signal is sent to the driver IC corresponding to the driving source instead of the motor driver 92. Control data is transmitted.

  The image control board 300 includes an image control CPU 301, a ROM 304, a RAM 305, and an I / O port circuit 306. The image control CPU 301 executes various calculation processes related to image effects based on the image control command from the effect control board 200. The ROM 304 stores an image control program and various data. The RAM 305 temporarily functions as a work area or a buffer memory as a storage area (temporary area). The I / O port circuit 306 inputs / outputs signals to / from a peripheral board or each device.

  The image control CPU 301 reads the image control program from the ROM 304, loads it into the RAM 305, and executes it to control the image display operation related to the effect according to the image control program. The ROM 304 corresponds to the ROM on the effect control ROM substrate.

  Further, on the image control board 300, VDP 302 that generates image data in accordance with the effect contents based on the control signal acquired from the image control CPU 301, and sound data in accordance with the effect contents based on the control signal acquired from the image control CPU 301. A sound source IC 303 to be generated is mounted. The VDP 302 is a so-called graphic processor, which reads image data stored in an image ROM (not shown) in response to an instruction from the image control CPU 301, and performs image processing on the image data to generate a video signal on the effect display device 70. Output to. The VDP 302 is connected to a high-speed VRAM (not shown) used for developing / processing the image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC 303 reads sound data stored in a voice ROM (not shown) in response to an instruction from the image control CPU 301, and synthesizes the sound data to generate sound data. The generated sound data is output to the speaker 11 via the effect control board 200 and the amplifier.

<Payout control board>
The payout control board 400 includes a payout control CPU 401, a payout control ROM 402, and a payout control RAM 403. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to control the payout operation of the game ball (prize ball operation), while depending on the operation amount of the firing handle 12. The ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are driven in synchronization with each other to control the launching operation of the game ball.

<Power board>
The power supply board 600 includes a normal power supply circuit, a backup power supply circuit, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The normal power supply circuit generates a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the gaming machine island. The backup power supply circuit generates a backup power supply. The power failure monitoring circuit has a function of monitoring power failure due to voltage drop.

  The power supply board 600 generates and supplies a power supply voltage necessary for electronic / electrical parts such as control boards and game machines. A power switch 600q for activating a power circuit is connected to the power board 600, and when the power switch 600q is turned on while the primary power is being supplied from the power supply device of the gaming machine island, Predetermined power is supplied from the normal power supply circuit to each control board and the like.

  The power supply board 600 has a function of detecting that power supply from the power supply device of the gaming machine island has been cut off (hereinafter also referred to as “power cutoff”), and a power cutoff signal for notifying that when power cutoff is detected. (NMI signal) is transmitted to the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged while power is being supplied from the power supply device on the game machine island to the game machine. A RAM clear switch 400q and a door open sensor 2q are connected to the power supply board 600. The RAM clear switch 400q is a switch for temporarily erasing the stored contents of the main control RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting the initial value when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The door open sensor 2q is a sensor that detects the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The RAM clear switch 400q and the door open sensor 2q may be connected to another board such as the main control board 100 instead of the power board 600.

<Basic operation example of gaming machine>
In the gaming machine configured as described above, the game is started in the state where the game balls are stored in the upper ball plate 8. First, when the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball dish 8 are sent to the firing mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feeding mechanism 13 provided on the back side of the glass frame 3. , Is fired to the game area 20A by the firing mechanism 14 at a firing strength according to the operation amount of the firing handle 12.

  When the game ball rolling down in the game area 20A enters any of the general winning opening 66, the first starting opening 61, the second starting opening 62 and the special winning opening 64, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. To be done. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 transmits a payout control command instructing a prize ball operation according to the type of the winning opening to the payout control board 400, so that the payout control board 400 receives the command to store the payout control command. The game balls of the tank 31 are paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, when the main control CPU 101 detects a ball entering the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62, it acquires a random number value of a special symbol, and the random value is up to a predetermined upper limit number. It is temporarily stored as a special design holding ball. The main control CPU 101, when a predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, then executes a winning / decision judgment and a symbol judgment of a special symbol for the lottery random number value related to the earliest holding ball, and a fluctuation pattern determination for selecting a fluctuation pattern. Is executed, and the special symbol is variably displayed using the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in a mode according to the determination result. At the same time, the main control CPU 101 transmits the effect control command to the effect control board 200 to cause the effect display device 70 to cause the effect display device 70 to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and the display of the variable effect. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern. Here, there is a ball entering the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62 and various random selection random number values are acquired, and further, the acquired random number values are held and the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. When doing a special symbol game by the special symbol display device, the process that results in the execution of the special symbol game is called "starting condition (is satisfied)".

  In the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. After shifting to a certain special game, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 64 is started according to the operation of the special electric accessory 642. On the other hand, the stop mode of the decorative symbol showing the big hit in the effect display device 70 is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols match. In this embodiment, as a special game, a 10R special game in which a round game is set to 10 times (10 rounds), a 5R special game in which a round game is set to 5 times (5 rounds), and a round game is 2 times. A 2R special game set for (2 rounds) is prepared.

  In the present embodiment, even if any of the 10R special game, the 5R special game, and the 2R special game is transferred, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a predetermined number of end times (also referred to as “ST number”) after the end of the special game. During the period until reaching (also referred to as "ST period"), the probability variation function (also referred to as "probability variation") of the special symbol operates. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is not continued until the next big hit occurs, but is limited until the number of STs is reached. In this way, when the probability variation function of the special symbol operates, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the low-probability state to the high-probability state, so that the probability of reaching a new jackpot relatively quickly becomes high.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, the main control CPU 101 may activate a variation time shortening function (hereinafter also referred to as “time saving”) of the special symbol in association with or separately from the probability varying function of the special symbol. When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the average variation time of the special symbol (and the decorative symbol) tends to be shorter than usual, the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved, and the last big hit ends. It will be easier to get the next big hit in a shorter time.

  Further, the main control CPU 101, when the special symbol variation time shortening function is activated, also activates a so-called electric Chu support function (normal electric accessory support function). In the electric Chu support function, any function or combination of the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory 622 open extension function operates. When the probability fluctuation function of the ordinary symbol operates, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol becomes higher than in the normal state. When the variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol is activated, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is changed from that in the normal gaming state (when the electric chewing support function is not activated). By being performed (for example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is longer than usual), the game ball easily enters the second starting opening 62 (also referred to as the "easy entry state"). When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 622 operates, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per certain time will increase due to the operation of the variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is released. Since the easiness of entering the second starting opening 62 is improved by the operation of the time extension function, the number of entering the second starting opening 62 is likely to increase. Therefore, due to the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting opening 62 during that period increase, and as a result, the player has It is possible to continue the game in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls compared to the normal game state.

<Example of main functional configuration of gaming machine>
The outline of the game operation of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is as described above. Next, the main functions of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board 100 mounted on the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

  The main control board 100, the entry determination means 110, the game lottery random number generation means 120, the hold control means 130, the advance determination means 135, the special symbol lottery processing means 140, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145, the special game control means 150, the symbol The display control means 155, the electric accessory control means 160, the game state control means 169, the error monitoring control means 170, the main information storage means 180, and the command transmission / reception means 190 are included. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is a main control CPU 101 provided on the main control board 100, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, hardware such as an electronic circuit, a main control ROM 102, and the like. Although it is composed of software such as a control program, it is expressed here as a functional block.

  The entrance determining means 110 detects signals from the first start opening switch 161, the second start opening switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the special winning opening switch 164, the general winning opening switch 166, the out-sphere detecting switch 167 and the like. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered each winning opening or the like.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated in the above-described random number generation circuit, and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be described later to this, and a random number per special symbol used in the winning / winning lottery of the special symbol. To generate. The game lottery random number generating means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main control CPU 101. These random number counters function as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software.

  As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to constitute a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining the initial value and the end value of the soft random number per special symbol , Special symbol per symbol used as a stop symbol of the special symbol (a combination of symbols that will operate the condition device, a combination of deviating symbols, etc.) used to determine the initial value and end value of the special symbol per symbol random number Special initial value random number per special symbol to determine, special symbol variation pattern random number used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol, normal random number per symbol to be used for win / loss lot of the regular symbol, random number per ordinary symbol Normal value random number per symbol to determine the initial value and the end value, normal symbol to be used to select the variation pattern of the regular symbol Such as dynamic pattern random number is included. In addition, the above-mentioned winning design means a winning design.

  These software random numbers are updated once every time timer interrupt processing occurs, and the initial value random number uses the remaining time of the interrupt cycle even while timer interrupt processing is not being executed (loop processing). And update.

  Hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62, a random value per special symbol, per special symbol. The symbol random number value, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 stores the main holding information so that the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) is combined with the entering order of the holding balls. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the means 180.

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, in the order of entering the starting openings 61, 62, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), the reserved 2 storage area (2 The third reserved storage area), the third reserved storage area (third reserved storage area), and the fourth reserved storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are respectively provided. Each reservation storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as operation reserve ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in the order of the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area, while the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage. The areas are digested according to the so-called first-in first-out principle. When the reserved sphere information in the reserved 1 storage area is exhausted, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the storage areas of lower numbers, respectively, and the reserved 4 Clear the contents of the storage area to zero.

  Special symbol holding control means 131, the first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, the second special symbol holding for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol It has a sphere counter. The special symbol holding control means 131, as the update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol, each time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, the corresponding counter is incremented by 1, and one operation holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  When the special symbol holding control means 131 updates the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (addition or subtraction), the production control command including the update information of the holding ball number ("symbol memory number command" Is referred to as “” and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. This 1 command includes information on both the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. In principle, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol will be digested in the order in which they enter the ball, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , To adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reserved ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reserved ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reserved related to the second special symbol game It is designed to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, when the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, the digestion of the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol will occur. It will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game when the game ball rolling down the game area 20A has passed through the gate 63, a random number value per ordinary symbol, a symbol per ordinary symbol A random number value, a normal symbol variation pattern random number value, is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-reserved sphere information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132, the operation holding ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four), the normal symbol holding storage area of the main information storing means 180 so as to be combined with the entering order of the holding ball. Temporarily store in. The normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the normal symbol. Normal symbol hold control means 132, as an update process of the number of holding balls of the working normal symbol, increments the corresponding counter every time one operation holding ball of the normal symbol is acquired, and one working holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  The pre-determination unit 135, when acquiring the operation reserve ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, executes the pre-determination for the pre-reading notice for the operation reserve ball. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) waiting for a hit, and when the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric Chu support function is not in operation, (2) waiting for a hit, and an electric cho If you get the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol during the support function is operating, (3) If you obtain the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol during the big hit or small hit, one of the conditions It is time to be satisfied. In the main control board 100, whichever timing the operation hold ball is acquired, a preliminary determination is performed and information is transmitted to the effect control board 200. It is also possible to decide.

  Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads a random number value corresponding to the operation holding ball acquired this time from the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the main information storage means 180, and wins / falls lottery. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment pre-judgment), pre-judgment of symbol lottery (pre-judgment of symbol), pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern lottery (pre-judgment of fluctuation pattern) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown in the drawing, but is divided in the same manner as the lottery table (special symbol win / loss table, special symbol per symbol table, variation pattern table) described later, and corresponds to the total number of random numbers. The area is divided into a plurality of areas, and a lottery ID is assigned to each of the areas (the number of determination values). In addition, the pre-determination by the pre-determination means 135, if it corresponds to the random number value used in the lottery when the fluctuation actually starts, the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area Instead of the data stored in the RAM, the data temporarily held in the RAM or the register of the CPU may be determined in advance.

  As the lottery ID, a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as "preliminary determination number") is set. The pre-determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as “pre-determination command”) including information on a pre-determination result (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. . It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the case where the preliminary determination result is transmitted as the information (lottery ID) to which random number range belongs, but the win / loss lottery table or the like used when actually starting the variation is used. Alternatively, the result of the lottery may be transmitted in advance.

  The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / discarding determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the random number per special symbol stored in the first storage area (holding 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180. The special symbol per symbol random value, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read, and this is stored in the special symbol right / wrong judgment area, the special symbol judgment area, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, the "variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied" means that, for example, when adopting the priority control of the second special symbol as in the present embodiment, (1) there is no big hit or small hit, (2) Both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, (3) The operation holding ball exists in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, all the conditions Means to be satisfied. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol can start changing.

  The special symbol hit determination unit 141 reads a random number per special symbol from the special symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination, and whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. To decide. The result of this hit determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 (for example, big hit data (for example, "55H"), small hit data (for example, "33H"), and outlier data (for example, "00H"), after being used in the subsequent processing, it is cleared when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.The special symbol win / loss determination means 141 refers to the special symbol win / loss table when making this win / fail determination. "H" shown after each of the above data is an acronym for "Hexadecimal (hexadecimal number)", which means that the data is represented in hexadecimal number. It indicates that the byte data is “01010101B (“ B ”is a binary number).” In particular, when a decimal number is used, no symbol is added or “D” is used. It is assumed that the description of those.

  FIG. 27 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning / winning lottery table referred to in a normal state as a so-called low probability state, and FIG. 27 (B) is referred to in a probability variation state as a so-called high probability state. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol winning / missing lottery table.

  In this special symbol winning / winning lottery table, the random numbers per special symbol and the determination results of the big hit, the small hit and the outfall are associated with each other. The winning probability of the big hit and the small hit is determined according to the random number range thus associated. As can be seen from these FIG. 27 (A) and FIG. 27 (B), in the winning / winning lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 219”, the big hit. Becomes On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of big hits is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 219”, but also when it falls within the range of “220 to 2184”. It is a big hit. That is, when the probability varying function of the special symbol operates, the lottery probability of the jackpot changes from the low probability state (about 1/300) to the high probability state (about 1/30).

  In this way, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of the big hit is the same in the winning / discarding lottery of the first special symbol and the winning / discarding lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number per special symbol does not correspond to the range of the big hit, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that there is a small hit only in the winning / discarding lottery of the first special symbol, but for example, a small hit is also prepared in the winning / discarding lottery of the second special symbol, and the winning / losing of the second special symbol The lottery may be configured to be a small hit with a higher probability than the win / loss lottery of the first special symbol, or the small hit may be prepared only for the win / loss lottery of the second special symbol.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can have a setting changing function that changes the degree of advantage of the game for the player by setting values in a plurality of stages. When the setting is changed in the pachinko machine 1 as described above, the range of the random number value which is a big hit is changed according to the setting (setting value). Therefore, a special symbol winning / winning lottery table having different jackpot ranges depending on the set value is prepared. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the ratio between the big hit lottery probability in the low probability state and the big hit lottery probability in the high probability state is constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, for example, regarding the jackpot lottery probability when the setting value is "1", if the low probability state is 1/300 and the high probability state is 1/30 (10 times the low probability state), The jackpot lottery probability when the setting value is "6" is 1/25 (10 times as high as the low probability state) in the high probability state when the low probability state is 1/250.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. To do. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 is a first special symbol per symbol table that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning / winning lottery is a big hit. And has a second special symbol per symbol table.

  In the first special symbol per symbol table, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), for the special symbol per symbol random value, the content of the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the big hit (the probability varying function of the special symbol and the variation time reduction) The number of times the function is operated and the operation pattern of the special winning opening 64 are associated with each other. In addition, the numerical value "100" in the parentheses means the number of times of operation of the probability varying function and the variation time reducing function of the special symbol, that is, the number of times of ST. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of big hit. In addition, in the present embodiment, the winning / missing lottery is out, and the winning symbol table in the case of small hit is not shown. However, in the case where the losing or small hit is all a single operation, the winning symbol table should be used. Instead, it is assumed that the deviating symbol and the small hit symbol are uniquely determined, and if it is desired to change the variation pattern or change the control mode of the special electric auditors by giving the deviating symbol or the small hit symbol a type. , Departure, and in the case of a small hit, the hit symbol table may be used to determine the symbol.

  Specifically, in the symbols "1", "2", "3", and "4", the symbol group A (10R specific time shortened symbol) and in the symbols "5" and "6", the symbol group B (5R specific time reduction symbol), symbol groups C (2R specific time reduction symbol) are associated with the symbols "7" and "8", respectively. In the present embodiment, the "specific symbol" is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, while the "normal symbol" activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game. It is a symbol that is not allowed (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

  The symbol groups A and B are specific symbols indicating a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of times the special symbol changes is a big hit within the number of STs. Until the end without generating, or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric choo support function are added. It Regarding the symbol group A, the prescribed round number of the special game is 10, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. On the other hand, for the symbol group B, the prescribed round number of the special game is 5, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  Although the symbol group C is different from the above "probability variation hit" in the number of times and opening time of the special winning opening 64, the gaming state after the special game is finished is shifted to the special symbol probability variation state (high probability state). The so-called "sudden probability change hit" is a specific symbol, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends without causing a big hit within the ST number, or until the next big hit occurs within the ST number. Only during the period, the probability change function of the special symbol and the change time shortening function, and the electric choo support function will be added. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 in one round game is about 1.8 seconds.

  On the other hand, if the result of the win / loss lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the special symbol per random number is omitted, and the symbol “9” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. A symbol group F (special electric operation symbol 1) is associated with the symbol “9”. In the case of a small hit, it does not trigger the change of the game state (probability change function, change time shortening function, electric Chu support function) and change pattern selection state, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning / winning lottery. To be done. If the result of the win / loss lottery is out of order, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second special symbol per symbol table, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), for the special symbol per symbol random value, the stop symbol, the symbol group, the contents of the big hit (the probability varying function of the special symbol) And the number of operations of the variable time shortening function, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors product 642 is respectively associated.In this second special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are , Are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbols “11”, “12”, “13”, and “14” include the symbol group D ( 10R specific time shortened symbol), the symbols "15", "16", "17", and "18" are associated with the symbol group E (5R specific time shortened symbol), respectively.

  The symbol groups D and E are specific symbols showing a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of times the special symbol varies is a big hit within the number of STs. Until the end without generating, or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric Chu support function are added. sell. Regarding the symbol group D, the prescribed round number of the special game is 10, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the prescribed number of rounds of the special game is 5, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the win / loss lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the special symbol random number is omitted, and the symbol “19” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. A symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2) is associated with the symbol “19”. In the case of a small hit, it does not trigger the change of the game state (probability change function, change time shortening function, electric chew support function) and change pattern selection state, and the winning result is off before and after the win / loss lottery. As in some cases, it is determined whether or not the ending condition of the game state such as the probability variation function is satisfied, and when the ending condition is not satisfied, the gaming state at the time of the small hit is maintained. If the result of the win / loss lottery is out of order, the symbol “0” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, three types of 10R big hits (10R specific time and short symbols), 5R big hits (5R specific and short symbols) and 2R big hits (2R specific and short symbols) are prepared. . The expected value for winning a prize ball in a special game (award value for winning a prize ball) is in the order of 10R jackpot> 5R jackpot> 2R jackpot. Therefore, hereinafter, the 10R jackpot is also referred to as "high profit jackpot" having the highest expected value for winning prize balls, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as "low profit jackpot" having the lowest expected value for winning prize balls. Even if the number of execution rounds is the same, if the long open round game (30 seconds) and the short open round game (1.8 seconds) are mixed, the big hit with many long open round games is “high”. It is a big hit for profit. "

  Specifically, the special game may include a special game that has a common number of execution rounds such as unifying the number of execution rounds to 10 rounds, but changes such that the mode of the round game is different in a predetermined round. In that case, a special game of only a short open round game in which the opening time of the special winning opening 64 is relatively short, and a long opening time of the special winning opening 64 after a predetermined number of execution rounds is long. It may include a special game of a type that switches to an open round game, and the latter constitutes a “high profit jackpot”. Even if the same number of execution rounds is a big hit, the substantial profit, that is, the expected value for winning a prize ball may be different depending on the difference in the big winning opening pattern.

  Here, as can be seen from the above description, in the case of a big hit in the win / no win lottery of the first special symbol, 10R big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the win / loss of the second special symbol If you win big by lottery, 10R big hit is selected with a probability of 75%. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 62 than to enter the game ball into the first starting port 61 in that there is a high possibility that more payouts can be obtained. The count number (specified count number) is the maximum possible number of game balls to enter the special winning opening 64 in the round game.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 shown in FIG. 25 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 has a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol, as illustrated in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 selects one of these plural kinds of fluctuation pattern tables based on the current fluctuation pattern selection state and the result of the winning / winning lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. A plurality of types of variation patterns are defined in each variation pattern table. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand in each figure, the "selection rate" is shown, but actually, the judgment value (random number value) for determining the variation pattern is determined according to the special symbol variation pattern random value. The range) is set, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is set for each variation pattern as the ending condition of the symbol variation, and it is premised that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed in the variation time. Is defined as Note that, in the present embodiment, for convenience of description, only a plurality of types of variation patterns will be described as an example, but in reality, there are more variation patterns.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits and small hits. The upper (A1) is a normal fluctuation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variable pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special fluctuation pattern table. In the present embodiment, the selected variation patterns are set to be different depending on the variation pattern selection state, or even in the same variation pattern selection state, depending on the jackpot type.

  In the normal variation pattern table (A1), the variation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected when the big hit type is 10R big hit, and the variation pattern is 5R big hit. PY2 (normal reach A) or variation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table for big hits and small hits, the fluctuation patterns in the non-reach mode are not selected, and when the big hit or the small hit is in the normal state, only the fluctuation patterns in the reach mode are selected. obtain.

  In the probability variation pattern table (A2), when the big hit type is 10R big hit or 5R big hit, only the change pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation pattern table for big hits and small hits, the variation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and when it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the probability variation state of the special symbol, only the variation pattern of the reach mode Can be selected.

  In the special fluctuation pattern table (A3), only the fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected when the big hit type is 10R big hit, and only the fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected when the big hit type is 5R big hit. Is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, only the variation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, the fluctuation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a super-shortened fluctuation time (2 seconds), while the fluctuation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C mode are configured as a relatively long fluctuation time (120 seconds). To be done.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern table for the deviation. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a probability variation pattern table, and the lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this embodiment, the selected variation pattern is set to be different depending on the variation pattern selection state and the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol.

  Normal variation pattern table (B1), it is assumed that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected (in the normal game state, the variation of the first special symbol is the main). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2 and PH1-3 corresponding to non-reach A, fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to non-reach B, normal reach A (N reach) Either PH2 corresponding to A), PH3 corresponding to super reach A (SP reach A), or PH4 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D) is selected. In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuations of non-reach A are excluded from pre-reading, and fluctuations other than non-reach A are pre-reading.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to the non-reach B may have different selection rates depending on the number of reservations. In addition, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach areas (N reach A, SP reach A, SP reach D) basically do not change the selection rate according to the number of reservations. However, in the case of a reach type with a low expectation, such as N reach A, the selection rate may be changed according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of holdings is small, the selection time of non-reach A or non-reach B is decreased and the selection ratio of N-reach A is increased, so that the change time becomes longer, so that a situation in which no change display is performed is avoided. The effect can be obtained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  The probability variation variation pattern table (B2) assumes that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected (in the probability variation state, the variation of the second special symbol is the main component). In the probability variation pattern table (B2), variation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 corresponding to non-reach B, PH6 corresponding to normal reach B (N reach B), PH7 corresponding to super reach B (SP reach B), Alternatively, any one of PH8 corresponding to super reach D (SP reach D) is selected. In the probability variation pattern table (B2), the fluctuations of non-reach B are excluded from the pre-reading targets, and the fluctuations other than non-reach B are pre-reading targets.

  In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 corresponding to the non-reach C is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as an ultra-shortened variation time (2 seconds). In the special variation pattern table (B3), all are excluded from prefetch targets.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 30, when the result of the winning / winning lottery is out of order, it is set so that a different variation pattern table is selected depending on the number of operation holding balls (0 to 4) of the special symbol. You can In other words, by using the variation pattern table according to the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, the larger the number of operation-holding balls is, the higher the ratio of relatively shorter variation time is selected is. The relatively long fluctuation time can be selected at a higher rate. Further, as the variation pattern table, it is also possible to classify the special symbols by type. For example, in a state in which the electric Chu support function such as a probability variation state is operating, the variation display of the second special symbol is easy, and as shown in FIG. 28, the jackpot of the second special symbol is also a big hit. When is advantageous, by setting the variation time of the first special symbol to a long time, it is possible to create a time for accumulating the suspension of the second special symbol that is preferentially controlled for variation. it can.

  For example, in the case of FIG. 30, in the probability variation pattern table (B2) which is supposed to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the selection rate of the entire non-reach B (variation patterns PH5-1, PH5-2) Is a constant 750/1000 regardless of the number of reservations. However, looking at the distribution of the fluctuation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 depending on the number of reservations, the situation where the reservations are accumulated (“the number of reservations 2 → 1”, “the number of reservations 3 → 2”, “the number of reservations 4 → 3”) )), The variation pattern PH 5-1 (5 seconds) with a short variation time is easily selected, whereas in the situation where the reservation is not accumulated (“the number of reservations 1 → 0”), the variation pattern PH 5- 2 (10 seconds) is easy to choose. In this way, according to the distribution, when the holding of the second special symbol is reduced in the probability variation state in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested, a long variation time is easily selected, so that the second special symbol is It becomes easier to expect a hold addition, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation in which all the holds of the second special symbol are digested and the hold digestion of the first special symbol is started.

  After the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, in order to instruct the production control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, the production control command including the variation pattern information of the special symbol (“variation”). Pattern designation command "), special symbols (symbol group) and effect control command including information on the game state (referred to as" symbol designation command "), production command including information on the number of holdings after the start of fluctuation (" symbol storage " Several commands ”) and the like (hereinafter, these effect control commands are collectively referred to as“ variation start command ”) and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has a normal symbol winning / discarding determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determining means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determining means 148. Normal symbol lottery processing means 145, when the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the random number per normal symbol stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value is read, The main symbol storage area 180 stores the normal symbol validity determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively.

  The normal symbol hit determination unit 146 reads the random number per ordinary symbol from the normal symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination, and determines whether the result of the determination corresponds to hit or miss. To do. The result of this winning / abstracting lottery is temporarily stored as a normal symbol determination flag in the main information storage means 180, and is used in the subsequent processing and then cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol win / loss determination means 146 holds the normal symbol win / loss lot reference table that is referred to in this win / win lottery. This normal symbol win / loss determination means 146, in the normal state (low probability state), for example, while referring to the normal symbol win / loss lottery table with a probability of "160/283", the probability variation state of the normal symbol (high probability state). ), For example, by referring to the normal symbol winning / winning lottery table which is a winning probability of “282/283”, the winning / winning lottery of the normal symbol is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table to select a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / disapproving lottery is a win, while the predetermined symbol is selected when the result is a win. Select the missing pattern. In addition, when it is desired to have a plurality of control patterns of the ordinary electric auditors, it may be designed to have a plurality of lottery results in the symbol lottery table of the ordinary symbols. Further, even if the winning ordinary symbols are the same, the control pattern of the ordinary electric auditors can be made different depending on whether the game state is in operation of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric auditors.

  Normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148, while reading the normal symbol variation pattern random value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table, the normal symbol variation display in the normal state In, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (for example, seven kinds of “4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds” are uniformly selected). On the other hand, in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the easy entry state), a relatively short variation time (for example, “0.5 seconds”) is selected.

  When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the special game control means 150 relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the type of the determined big hit. Determine the demonstration production time. The special game control means 150 directs the production control board 200 side to perform a start demo production (referred to as "big hit start demo command") and a production control command to instruct execution of an end demo production. A "big hit end demo command" is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the big hit start demo command also serves as an opportunity to determine the contents of a series of big hit effects (start demonstration effect, round effect, end demonstration effect) that are developed during the special game on the effect control board 200 side. It should be noted that the demonstration effect time determined by the special game control means 150 is not limited to this embodiment, and it is possible to determine the demonstration state other than the type of big hit based on the game state at the time of a big hit.

  When the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game, this is generated. It is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The round effect designation command includes a round start command including information on the current number of rounds transmitted at the start of a round, and a large effect for executing a winning effect based on detection of the special winning opening switch 164 during a round game. Includes the winning award winning command.

  When the result of the winning / winning lottery is a small hit, the special game control means 150 determines the demonstration effect time relating to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 during the small hit game. . The special game control means 150, the production control command for instructing the execution of the small hit start demonstration effect (“small hit start demo command”) and the effect control command for instructing the execution of the small hit end demonstration effect (“small hit end demo”). Command ") and stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156, according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, causes the first special symbol to be variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 171, and the first special symbol after this variable display is finished. Is confirmed. Special symbol display control means 156, according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 172, and the second special symbol is fixedly displayed after the variation display. Let Special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 171 and the second special symbol display device 172 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. Special symbol display control means 156, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, when the special symbol game timer manages the variation time, at the timing when its value becomes "0"), production control An effect control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command") for requesting the final display of the decorative pattern to the substrate 200 is generated.

  On the other hand, the normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 175 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and after the variation display, the normal symbol is fixedly displayed. Normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 175 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  When the result of the special symbol winning / winning lottery is a big hit, the electric auditors product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric auditors solenoid 124 as a special game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the special electric winning combination is performed. The object 642 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric auditors product 642 is regarded as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds (10R, 5R, 2R in the present embodiment). The electric accessory control unit 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 642 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, when the big hit type is the so-called 10R big hit (symbol group A, D) or 5R big hit (symbol group B, E), the big winning opening 64 is opened for a maximum of about 30 seconds in one round game. .. On the other hand, when the big hit type is the so-called 2R big hit (symbol group C), the big winning opening 64 is opened for a maximum of about 1.8 seconds in one round game. Here, the closing condition of the special winning opening 64 in the special game (the ending condition of the round game) is the elapse of the winning period of the specified number of game balls or the openable period of the specified number of seconds.

  If the result of the special symbol win / win lottery is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 124 as a small hit game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The electric accessory 642 is opened for a short period of time. The small hit game is a special game composed of one round game, and is distinguished from the big hit game of the special game composed of a plurality of round games. In particular, both the small hit game and the big hit game are special games in which it is easy to obtain a payout based on the operation of the special electric auditors product 642, but the special electric auditors product 642 can be continuously operated. It is divided according to whether the accessory continuous operation device is operating.

  When the winning combination lottery of the normal symbol is won, the electric accessory controlling means 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric accessory solenoid 123 to open the normal electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control unit 160 opens the normal electric accessory 622 for an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, while the normal electric operation is performed in the easy entry state (electric chewing support state). The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

  When the result of the special lot winning and winning lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 169 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of the symbol group related to the big hit, and after the end of the special game. Switch the game state of. In the following, among the various functions related to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, 1) probability variation function of the special symbol, variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the game state in which the electric Chu support function operates are referred to as "probability variation state", 2) The game state in which only the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function operates is called "time saving state", and 3) the game state in which only the probability fluctuation function of special symbol operates is called "latency probability changing state". 4) A state in which all the functions are not operating is called a "normal state". It should be noted that the “probability change state”, the “time saving state”, and the “latent probability change state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the “normal state”.

  In the following, each game state, by the combination of the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the operating state of the normal symbol game (with electric chu support function operation / without electric chu support function operation), (1 ) Probability change state is "high probability / high base", (2) Time saving state is "low probability / high base", (3) Latent probability change state is "high probability / low base", (4) Normal state is "low probability / high base". Sometimes called "/ low base" ("base" refers to the number of prize balls per number of balls to be launched, and during operation of the electric choo support function, it is possible to win prize balls by operating ordinary electric auditors). Is called "high base". In the present embodiment, as an example, the game state after the end of the special game, until the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined ending number of times (that is, the number of STs described above) from the end of the special game The probability variation state continues (However, if the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the variation probability state ends with the fluctuation, and at the end of the big hit game, the big hit type and corresponding game based on the big hit symbol again. Transition to the state). When the small hit occurs during the ST period, the ST number is not reset to 0, and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small hit occurs. In the present embodiment, the ST number is set to 100 times as an example, but may be set to another number. In addition, when it shifts to the probability variation state, the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric Chu support function operate at the same time, and each function will continue as long as the probability variation state continues.

  If the result of the special symbol winning / winning lottery is a big hit, whether the game state before the big hit is a normal state or a probability changing state, it is a normal state during the special game and the number of STs is increased after the special game. As a limit, it will be in a certain change state. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol win / win lottery is a small hit, if the gaming state before the small hit was the normal state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game will also be the normal state. If the gaming state before the small hit is the probability change state of the special symbol, the gaming state after the small hit game and after the small hit game also becomes the probability change state of the special symbol.

  When the result of the winning / winning lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 169 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of the big hit (the type of the symbol groups A to E), and after the special game. Change the variation pattern selection state of. The fluctuation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the above-described fluctuation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is at the end of the special game or when the number of end times of the variation pattern selection state is completed. In the present embodiment, there are three types of variation pattern selection states, such as “low-probability normal variation state α”, “high-probability shortened variation state β”, and “high-probability special variation state γ”. Here, the low probability normal variation state α is a special symbol with reference to the normal variation pattern table (A1 in FIG. 29 and B1 in FIG. 30) selected when the game state is the normal state (low probability state). This is the state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined. High probability shortening variation state β refers to the probability variation pattern table (A2 in FIG. 29 and B2 in FIG. 30) selected when the gaming state is a certain variation state (excluding a limited period described later) of the special symbol. It is a state of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. High probability special variation state γ is a certain variation period of the special symbol in the game state and a certain period immediately after the end of the special game (the number of symbol variations corresponding to the maximum number (4 pieces) of the operation reserve balls of the second special symbol) (4 times) period of variation display: referred to as "limited period") The special variation pattern table (A3 of FIG. 29 and B3 of FIG. 30) in which only selection is permitted is referred to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Is ready to go. In the present embodiment, whichever of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, in the high probability special variation state γ only for a limited period of four symbol variations. Staying, (2) staying in the high-probability shortening variation state β after the execution of the limited period, and when the execution count is within the ST count (100), (3) after the ST count ends, that is, After the 101st execution, the low-probability normal fluctuation state α stays. Of course, the period until the first hit occurs stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state α. The game state control means 169 generates an effect control command including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information (referred to as “game state designation command”), and stores this in the command storage of the main information storage means 180. Store in area. Further, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and a plurality of special fluctuation states γ may be provided so that different special fluctuation states can be referred to at different timings during one variation time shortening game state period ( For example, stay in the special variation state γ1 four times after the end of the big hit, and further provide the special variation state γ2 to stay in the shortened variation state β 95 times and then stay in one special symbol game).

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal from a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio detection signal from a radio sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to instruct the effect control board 200 of the error state effect. Although not all shown in FIG. 24, the door opening switch is a detecting means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 3 is opened, and the frame opening switch (door opening sensor 2p) is used when the front frame 4 is opened. The back set opening switch is a detection unit that detects whether or not the back set board is open. The magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a fraudulent act (so-called goth act).

  The main information storage unit 180 is random number information obtained in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game (probably changed state, time saving state, Information on easy entry), information on fluctuation pattern selection status, result information of winning / discarding lottery (big hit, small hit, out), information on stop symbols and fluctuation patterns related to special symbols and normal symbols, information on special games (round) Number, opening time, opening mode (opening number per round game), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 171, 172, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric auditors product 642, production control command It is configured to temporarily store information necessary for controlling the progress of the game such as data information, and stores each information. And a predetermined storage area.

  The command transmission / reception unit 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure that includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. To distinguish MODE data from EVENT data, the 7th bit of MODE data is "1", the seventh bit of the EVENT data is "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, a strobe signal is output for each of MODE data and EVENT data.

  The production control board 200 can receive the MODE data and the EVENT data, respectively, upon receiving the strobe signal output in this way. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted one command each for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180, and EVENT data.

  The setting changing unit 195 executes "setting changing processing" for changing the game setting. When the front frame 4 is in the open state (the door open sensor 2p detects the door open) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, the setting changing means 195 turns on the power switch 600q while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q. In this case, the state is changed to the setting change state described above.

  The setting changing unit 195 causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory (for example, a part of the RAM storage area provided by the main control RAM 103) when the setting change state is entered. The setting display unit 197 displays the setting value by a 7-segment display provided on the main control board 100, for example. At this time, the setting changing unit 195 changes the set value displayed on the setting display unit 197 from “1” → “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” in response to the pressing of a predetermined setting change button. The setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as that displayed on the setting display unit 197, by sequentially changing the order of "6", "1", ... In this example, the RAM clear switch 400q is used as the setting change button, but another button may be used or a dedicated button may be provided. When the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting changing unit 195 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

  The setting confirmation means 196 executes "setting confirmation processing" for confirming the game setting. The setting confirmation means 196 turns on the power switch 600q without pressing the RAM clear switch 400q when the front frame 4 is open (the door open sensor 2p detects the door open) and the setting key switch 100q is on. If it is done, the above-mentioned setting confirmation state is entered.

  The setting confirmation unit 196 displays the set value stored in the setting memory on the setting display unit 197 when the setting confirmation state is entered. However, unlike the setting changing unit 195 described above, the setting checking unit 196 does not change the installation value displayed on the setting display unit 197 even if the setting change button (for example, the RAM clear switch 400q) is pressed, Further, the set value stored in the setting memory is not changed. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting confirmation unit 196 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

  Note that the setting value data managed in the setting memory may use the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead of the numerical values of "1" to "6". In this case, the setting value “0” corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value “1” corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value “2” corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value “3” corresponds to the setting 4. The setting value “4” may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value “5” may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is abnormal, the RAM clear process is performed and the set value data is set to the initial value "0". Can be simplified. Further, when performing some sort of lottery using the set value data, for example, when different tables or data are selected for each set value in the prefetching process, there is an advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, when these values are used as they are as the offset data for the table or data selection, additional processing such as -1 is added to the start address is required. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the numerical values of “0” to “5” are used as the setting value data, the setting changing unit 195 and the setting confirming unit 196 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display unit 197, or the setting may be performed. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 197. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be made easy for the manager of the gaming machine to understand.

  FIG. 26 is a functional block diagram showing an example of functions of the effect control board 200 in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The effect control board 200 includes an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp effect control means 230, a character effect control means 240, an error effect control means 250, an effect control information storage means 260 and a command transmission / reception means 270. . Each of the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200 is a control program stored in the effect control CPU 201, the effect control ROM 202, the effect control RAM 203, the electronic circuit and the like arranged on the effect control board 200, and the effect control ROM 202. It is a functional representation of what is configured by software such as.

  The effect lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the effect control CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the pre-reading notice lottery random number used in the lottery of whether to execute the pre-reading notice production, the pre-reading notice pattern random number used to select the pre-reading notice pattern, the decorative pattern random number used to select the decorative design stop pattern, the decoration Random effect pattern random number used to select the variable effect pattern of the pattern, advance notice random number pattern used to select the advance effect pattern, big hit effect pattern random number used to select the big hit effect pattern It includes a random number for lottery production used for lottery, a random number for lottery production pattern used for selection of a lottery production pattern for production in a holding lot, and so on. The update time of these random numbers is updated by using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the effect control side main processing described later. Although the random numbers used for each lottery are named for convenience, they may have commonly used random numbers.

  The production generalizing means 220 includes a production mode control means 221, a holding information display control means 222, a pre-read notice control means 223, a decorative symbol determination means 224, a variation production determination means 225, a notice production determination means 226 and a big hit production determination means 227. .

  Hold information display control means 222, a first holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, a second holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol Have When receiving the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the suspension information display control means 222, based on the information on the number of operation suspension balls included in this symbol storage number command, the first suspension ball number counter and the second suspension ball. Update the value of the number counter. Then, when the pachinko machine 1 uses the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 or the like as the game board, the holding information display control means 222 produces an effect based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter. On the hold display section of the display device 70, control is performed to display a number of hold images corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and a number of hold images corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. . In the normal display mode, a white image is displayed as a hold image when an operation holding ball with a special symbol is generated, while when the hold change look-ahead notice effect described below is executed, the hold that is the subject of the look-ahead notice is held. The image can take any one of “blue”, “green”, “red” and “rainbow” as a special display mode (display color) from “white” which is a normal display mode (display color). The above four types of special display modes are related to the degree of reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as “big hit reliability”), and are “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. It is set so that the jackpot reliability becomes higher one step at a time. In the present embodiment, when the hold image changes to “rainbow color”, the big hit is definite in the pre-reading target operation hold ball. It should be noted that, in the hold change prefetching notice effect, the change in the display mode of the hold image may be expressed by the shape or the pattern instead of the display color.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 uses the game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 or the like as the game board, since the liquid crystal display device 70 is not provided, the holding information display control means 222 causes the first holding ball number counter and the first holding ball counter. The hold display is performed by controlling the lighting of the hold display LED 75 (the first hold display LED 751, the second hold display LED 752) based on the value of the 2 hold ball number counter. Specifically, the first hold display LEDs 751a to 751d are sequentially turned on (or may be blinking) by a number corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol (or may be blinking), and a number corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is The 2 hold display LEDs 752a to 752d are sequentially turned on (or may be blinking). As described above, since the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752 are composed of single-color LEDs, the hold display LED 75, like the hold image of the liquid crystal display device 70, is a hold change subject to the prefetch notice. It is not possible to execute the pending change prefetching notice effect such as changing the display color for (prefetch target suspension). However, it is possible to specify the prefetch target suspension by changing the lighting of the suspension display LED 75 to blinking. Further, as will be described in detail later, instead of the hold change prefetching notice effect by the liquid crystal display device 70, the anticipation degree suggesting effect of the prefetch target hold can be executed by using the expectation degree display LED 76 configured by a full-color LED. . In addition, in the configuration of the game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 and the like, when the sub effect display device displayed by a display device such as a liquid crystal is provided, regarding the display of the number of holdings, each special symbol is displayed in a corner on the liquid crystal. The number of reservations may be small and displayed by two numbers. By additionally displaying on the liquid crystal in this way, an accurate display of the number of holdings can be ensured even when the holding display LED 75 fails.

  The pre-reading notice control means 223 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed by lottery when the pre-reading notice is received from the main control board 100. The pre-reading notice control means 223 distinguishes the information of the preliminary determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the preliminary determination result of the second special symbol, respectively, up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces), entering the operation-holding ball. It is temporarily stored in the prefetch information storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 so as to be combined with the order. This read-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved storage area of the main control board 100, and the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area) is arranged in the order of ball entry into the starting ports 61 and 62. A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are provided. Each of the holding storage areas can store the information of the success / failure preliminary determination result, the information of the symbol preliminary determination result, and the information of the variation pattern preliminary determination result as one set.

  When determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice, the pre-reading notice control unit 223 makes a pre-reading determination (“pre-reading determination”) for the operation-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice, based on the preliminary determination result by the main control board 100. Also called). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice, in addition to the above-mentioned pending change pre-reading notice, is a so-called continuous notice production that gives notice of the possibility of jackpot winning or reach production over a plurality of continuous variable display of decorative patterns. Have. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, the information of the pre-determination command (result of the pre-determination) and the information of the symbol storage number command (the number of existing operation-holding balls) from the main control board 100 are set. After analysis, the look-ahead notice effect pattern over a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation holding ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) that triggers the occurrence of the look-ahead notice effect this time. Note that there are various variations of the pre-reading notice, such as a pending change pre-reading notice production, a chance eye pre-reading notice production, and a background change pre-reading notice production. In addition, as another type of prefetching, there is a hold-in-long-end-of-house condominium effect that suggests or notifies the possibility that there is an operation holding ball that becomes a big hit during a big hit game or when a change that is a big hit is being executed.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern prefetch determination table. The variation pattern prefetch determination table illustrated in FIG. 31 is a determination table used in the prefetch determination by the prefetch advance notice control unit 223, and the variation of each variation determined using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30 and the like. The type of read-ahead (A to D) is selected based on the pattern.

  According to FIG. 31, the read-ahead type A (non-read-ahead) is a change pattern that is not a target of read-ahead (change patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, PH5-1, PH5-2 according to FIG. 30). Selected from. When the pre-reading type A is selected, the pre-reading effect targeting the variation is not executed.

  Here, in the normal variation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 30, the selection rate of the non-reach A that is not pre-read is the total of the variation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, regardless of the number of reservations. 750/1000, which matches the selection rate of the prefetch type A in FIG. That is, in this example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach A is determined at the normal time (first special symbol), the prefetch effect for the variation is not always executed, and the prefetch determination results are all ID = 0. Further, in the normal variation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 30, only the non-reach A is set so that the variation pattern selection rate varies depending on the number of reservations. From this, it can be said that, in the present example, the prefetch determination results are all ID = 0 in the range of the random number value in which the variation pattern in which the selectivity depends on the number of holdings is selected.

  The prefetch type B (weak prefetch) is selected from the non-reach (variation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5) to be prefetched at the normal time or the variation pattern determined as N reach at the time of probable variation (variation pattern PH6). It When the look-ahead type B is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a low degree of expectation is executed for the variation.

  The pre-reading type C (medium pre-reading) is selected from the variation patterns determined as N reach (variation pattern PH2) at the normal time, or N reach B or SP reach B (variation patterns PH6, PH7) at the time of probability variation. When the look-ahead type C is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a medium degree of expectation is executed for the variation.

  The pre-reading type D (strong pre-reading) is selected from the variation pattern determined as SP reach or more at the normal time (variation patterns PH3 and PH4) or the SP reach D at the probability variation (variation pattern PH8). When the look-ahead type D is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a high degree of expectation is executed for the variation. It should be noted that configuring the pre-reading effect having different expectations depending on the pre-reading types B, C, and D is to change the pre-reading effect lottery table according to the ID of the pre-reading determination result in the main control board 100. Alternatively, the result of using the same table may be changed to a higher prefetching effect than the selected prefetching effect.

  Note that, in the above example, the variation pattern prefetch determination table of FIG. 31 is shown as the common table for the normal time and the probability variation time, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and it can be used for both the normal time and the probability variation time. Different tables may be prepared, and different tables may be prepared for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the production mode control means 221 controls the production mode transition so as to be consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Run. In the present embodiment, as the three types of effect modes, a normal effect mode α, a probability variation effect mode β, and a special effect mode γ are included, and the variation patterns of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 are the same. Also, the variation effect pattern (details described later) that specifies the specific content of the symbol variation effect is set to be different for each effect mode. On the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (a background image that is a rear display of a decorative pattern in the present embodiment) corresponding to the effect mode of the current stay is displayed, and this background image is for each effect mode. Since they are set so as to be different from each other, the player can recognize which of the effect modes the user is currently staying in from the type of the background image.

  An outline of each performance mode will be given. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low-probability normal fluctuation state α is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and the “normal background” is displayed as the background image thereof. . The probability variation effect mode β is set when the high-probability shortening variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and “probability variation background” is displayed as the background image thereof. The special effect mode γ is set when the high-probability special variation state γ is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. This special effect mode stays up to the period (limited period) of four times immediately after the end of the special game, and when the limited period is exceeded, the special effect mode transits to the probability variation effect mode β. When the on-hold condominium effect is generated during the special game, the "special background" is displayed as the background image. On the other hand, when the pending holiday game effect does not occur during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is not executed, the “probability variation background” common to the probability variation effect mode is displayed as the background image.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224, based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the final stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, The right pattern) is decided by lottery. In this embodiment, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed of, for example, an identification element composed of numbers or letters. In this embodiment, a total of 10 types such as numbers “1” to “9” and letters “S” are set as the identification elements. Each decorative design is in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “8” → “9” → “S” according to the arrangement of the design sequence, in the left display area, the middle display area, and the right. Each is cyclically displayed in the display area.

  The decorative symbol determination unit 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a loss (deletion symbol)". The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probability variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same odd number are arranged (for example, "7,7,7"). The big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (uncertain variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same even number are arranged (for example, "2.2.2"). The off symbol is a combination of stop modes in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers (for example, "1.3.8"). Here, the out-of-reach symbol of the out-of-symbols is a combination of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol are coincident (for example, "3.1.3"). Become. In addition, in the case of a "stop design indicating a small hit (small hit design)" or a 2R big hit design even if it is a big hit design, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7" is used. There are cases. In addition, in this embodiment, "S, S, S" is provided as a special jackpot symbol for definitely notifying the in-hold holiday resort. The decorative symbol determination means 224 is a normal jackpot symbol (“3, 3, 3,”, etc.) when the holiday attraction effect pattern PA2 is selected when it is determined to execute the in-hold holiday attraction effect. Is replaced with a special jackpot design (“S / S / S”).

  The variation effect determination means 225 defines a variation process (effect process) from variation start to stop in the variation display of the decorative pattern based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Determine the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, as the symbol variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display, a reach effect having a simple effect content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect in which the effect content develops midway (super reach effect) are included. . The variation effect determination unit 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol from these multiple types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Corresponding to the variable effect pattern table is selected. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random number value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, on the main control board 100 side, a basic pattern of symbol fluctuation (for example, “normal reach A”, “super reach A”, etc.) is determined as a fluctuation pattern, whereas on the effect control board 200 side, a variation effect pattern is set. A detailed pattern of pattern variation (for example, "normal reach A1, A2, A3 ...", "Super reach A1, A2, A3 ...", etc.) that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail based on the basic pattern is determined. In this way, in the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, a variable display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the end of the change is defined. The timing at which the notice effect is generated in each stage is also defined as the time schedule. In addition, the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern, and in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of a variable production pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and in the case of a specific variation production pattern, the left symbol → the middle symbol → the right symbol in order. It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stop order of the above-mentioned principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high.

  The notice production determination unit 226 determines a notice production pattern that defines the content of the notice production executed at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation production pattern described above. The notice production pattern includes a production pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character, animation, etc., a production pattern for outputting a specific voice, a production pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice production is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol, and predictively suggests that the symbol variation has a high jackpot reliability that stops in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect executed before the reach state occurs (including the reach occurrence time) and a notice effect executed after the reach state occurs in the process of changing the decorative pattern. The notice performances have different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot reliability than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The notice production determination unit 226 holds a notice production pattern table that is referred to when selecting a notice production pattern for each type of notice production, and according to the type of notice production that occurs according to the scenario of the variable production pattern. Select the notice production pattern table. The notice production determination unit 226 refers to the notice production pattern table selected above and, based on the notice production pattern random number value obtained from the production lottery random number generation unit 210, selects a plurality of types of notice production patterns by lottery. Select one. Note that, as the types of specific notice production patterns, comment notice production patterns, background notice production patterns, SU (step-up) notice production patterns, group notice production patterns, cut-in notice production patterns, character movable notice production patterns, Etc. are prepared. This notice effect is basically performed by executing one or more notice effects in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even in the case of the variable display of the decorative pattern by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of notice effects.

  The big hit production determination means 227 determines the contents of the big hit production (big hit production pattern) for notifying that the special game is in progress. The big hit performance includes a start demonstration effect for notifying the start of the special game, a round effect for notifying that the round game is in progress, and an end demo effect for notifying the end of the special game. When the big hit production determination means 227 receives the big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, based on the big hit type information stored in the production control information storage means 260, the big hit production pattern (start demo production pattern, round production). Pattern, end demonstration effect pattern). In this big hit production pattern, a big hit start demonstration production time, a round production time (production time according to the opening pattern of the special winning opening 64), and a big hit end demonstration production time are set according to the big hit type, and A series of performance contents are set along the time axis. According to the big hit production pattern, the big hit production determination means 227 executes the start demonstration production upon receiving the big hit start demo command from the main control board 100, and upon receiving the round production designating command, executes each round production. It executes, and when the big hit end demo command is received, the end demo effect is executed.

  Here, in the normal big hit start demonstration effect, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to notify the start of the special game. In the normal round effect, for example, the number of currently executed rounds and the number of prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the special game are displayed. In the normal big hit end demonstration effect, for example, the character "end of big hit" is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the special game.

  As described above, the effect generalizing means 220, based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, condominium effect effect pattern, change effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop design pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.), image control commands relating to images and sounds. Is generated and stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260.

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, etc. according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25), and according to the determined effect pattern. The lamp data is read and the lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The character effect control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The character effect control unit 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable character, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. There is.

  The effect control information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information on a decorative pattern, information on a variable effect pattern, information on a notice effect pattern, information on a control command, and the like, and stores each information. It has a predetermined storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands, respectively.

  The command transmission / reception unit 270 is configured to receive the production control command transmitted from the main control board 100 upon receiving the strobe signal output together with the production control command, and store the production control command in the production control command buffer. ing. Specifically, the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 executes reception interrupt processing of the production control command in response to an interrupt generated when the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is input, and various reception interrupt processing is performed in this reception interrupt processing. Get the production control command. The details of the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command will be described later. When the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 preferentially executes the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command over other interrupt processing.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative design information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 using the serial communication method as an example. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this embodiment) according to the order set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260.

  Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. At each stage of the variable display process, the notice effect is displayed by being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change. Further, the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board side>
32 to 53 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100. The operation process on the main control board 100 side mainly includes a main control side main process and a main control side timer interrupt process.

<Main processing on the main control side>
32, 33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of main control side main processing executed in the main control board 100. In the main processing on the main control side, the main control program is started after the security check of the main control CPU 101 is performed by the reset when the power is turned on, and the processing is executed by the main control program. In the following description, the subject of each process may be omitted as appropriate.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a leading address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (step S1), and access to the main control RAM 103 is permitted (step S2). Next, a vector table storing the start address of the main control program to be processed when the timer interrupt occurs is set (step S3), and an initial value is set in the internal register of the main control CPU 101 (step S4).

  Next, the main control CPU 101 confirms the operation state of the setting key switch 100q (step S5), and if the setting key switch 100q is on (YES in step S5), confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch 400q. (Step S6). If the RAM clear switch 400q is on in step S6 (YES in step S6), the setting change process is executed (step S7). Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but after the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is in the off state in step S6 (NO in step S6), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S8). Details of the setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but after the setting confirmation processing ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

  When the setting key switch 100q is off in step S5 (NO in step S5), the main control CPU 101 confirms the operation state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S9). If the RAM clear switch 400q is in the on state in step S9 (YES in step S9), the process proceeds to step S13 in order to perform normal RAM clear processing without changing the setting. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is off in step S9 (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S10 without performing any special process.

  In step S10, the main control CPU 101 reads the value of the power-off information flag and determines whether or not the information of normal power-off is stored (step S10).

  Here, when the information indicating that the power is cut off is stored, the checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the main control RAM 103 (step S11). It is determined whether this checksum is 0, that is, whether the checksum is normal (step S12). Note that the power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described below, so if the backup was successful, the power-on checksum Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether or not the information stored in the main control RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up.

  If the checksum is normal in step S12 (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S16, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before power-off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal in step S12 (NO in step S12) or after the setting change process in step S7 is completed, the entire area of the main control RAM 103 targeted for the initialization process is cleared to zero ( Step S13). In the initialization process of step S13, the specific RAM storage area is not cleared to zero. For example, the setting value stored in the setting memory is not cleared, and the setting value set in the setting change processing in step S7 is retained as it is.

  Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the main control RAM 103 (step S14). Next, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamps 10 and 25, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is made (step S15).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, setting of power-on normal information, initial setting of various errors, and initial setting of communication with the payout control board 400 in the main control RAM 103 are sequentially executed (step S16). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on is correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the transfer byte number are set, and the data for the transfer byte number is transferred (step S17). The value of the special symbol game status at the time of power-off is read, and the power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is executed (step S18).

  Next, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are requested to transmit an effect control command (“power off recovery command”) at the time of power off recovery (step S19). This power-off recovery command includes information regarding the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening, the number of times of easy entry, variation pattern selection state, and error state. It should be noted that the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information of the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and a performance control command including the information of the number of operation reserved balls is requested ( Step S20).

  Next, the reset setting for returning the normal electric accessory 622 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second starting opening 62 is opened) is performed (step S21). Further, the reset setting for returning the special electric accessory 642 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the special winning opening 64 is opened) is performed (step S22). Next, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (step S23). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (step S24). Next, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S25). To prepare for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set (step S26).

  Next, to determine the occurrence of power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether power failure has occurred (step S27). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (step S28). In this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value determined for each random number, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, the interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt process (step S29), the process returns to the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S25), and the loop process from step S25 to S29 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the occurrence of the next interrupt process is used to execute the steps from step S25. The processing up to S29 is repeated. If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is permitted in step S29. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in step S27, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to step S30 and the power-off time process described below is executed.

  Next, as a power-off process (steps S30 to S36), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S30). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (step S31). If the power-on information is normal, the power-off information flag is set to power-off normal data (step S32). On the other hand, when the power-on information is not normal, the power-off information flag is set to power-off abnormal data (step S33), and the process proceeds to step S36.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the main control RAM 103 (step S34). The complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the main control RAM 103 (step S35). Next, the access prohibition setting of the main control RAM 103 is performed (step S36), and the process is repeatedly executed until the power is cut off.

<Setting change processing>
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The series of processes illustrated in FIG. 35 shows the setting change process of step S107 in FIG. 32 in detail, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

  According to FIG. 35, the main control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is normal (step S101). If the set memory value is not normal in step S101 (NO in S101), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S102). Specifically, for example, when using "1" to "6" as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the initial value is " 0 ”is set. After the process of step S102, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if the set memory value is normal in step S101 (YES in S101), the process of step S102 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the setting change state is entered. Then, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 197 (step S104).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not a setting change button (for example, a RAM clear switch 400q) has been changed (step S105). If there is a change operation using the setting change button (YES in step S105), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (step S106). When there is no change operation by the setting change button (NO in step S105), the process of step S106 is skipped.

  Next, it is confirmed whether the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is off (step S107). If the setting key switch 100q remains in the ON state after the determination is NO in step S5 of FIG. 32 (NO in step S107), the process returns to step S104 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned to the original position and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S107), the setting display unit 197 is turned off to make the set value invisible (non-display) (step S107). S108), and returns. As described above, after the return, the process of step S13 of FIG. 32 is performed.

<Setting confirmation process>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The series of processing illustrated in FIG. 36 shows the setting confirmation processing of step S108 in FIG. 32 in detail, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

  According to FIG. 36, first, the main control CPU 101 causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory (step S111).

  After that, the main control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation state of the setting key switch 100q is the off state (step S112). If the setting key switch 100q remains on (NO in step S112) after the determination in step S5 of FIG. 32 is NO (NO in step S112), the process returns to step S111 to repeat the process and continue displaying the set value. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned to the original position and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S112), the setting display unit 197 is turned off to make the setting value invisible (non-display) (step S112). S113) and returns. As described above, after the return, the process of step S10 of FIG. 32 is performed.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a transition condition to the above-mentioned setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, there is a frame opening which is the first procedure to enhance security. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 32, when it is determined to be the ON state (YES in step 5) in the determination of the operation state of the setting key switch 100q in step S5, the state of the frame opening switch (door opening sensor 2p) It is also checked together, and the process proceeds to step S6 only when the frame is in the open state (door open). Even if the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state at the time of determination in step S5, if the frame is not in the open state (door closed), it is a state in which an illegality or an abnormality is suspected. S7) or the setting confirmation process (step S8) is not followed by step S6, the process waits until the setting key switch 100q is turned off, and when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the process proceeds to step S9.

<Main control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the relationship between the drawings for explaining the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. First, FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are flowcharts showing an example of the timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 100. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing details of the starting port monitoring control processing shown in FIG. 37, respectively. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process shown in FIG. 38, and FIGS. 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process shown in FIG. 41, respectively. 44 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process shown in FIG. 38. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. 46 to 50 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol variation start process, the special symbol variation process, and the special symbol stop symbol displaying process shown in FIG. 45, respectively. 51 to 53 are flowcharts showing details of the special electric auditors product control processing shown in FIG. 38, respectively.

  First, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 37 is executed by interrupting the main processing on the main control side when a timer interrupt is generated in response to a clock pulse from the CTC circuit at constant time intervals (for example, 4 ms). It The terms "conditional device" and "feature continuous actuating device" used below mean conceptual control devices. The "condition device" is activated when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game, and the "feature continuous operation device" is capable of continuously operating the "special electric auditors" a plurality of times.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main control CPU 101 (data used during the main processing on the main control side) are saved in the stack area of the main control RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set. It is set (step S51). Next, the interrupt operation condition setting value is set in the interrupt control register (step S52). Next, clear word 2 is set (step S53).

  Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (step S54). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written into the WDT clear register of the main control CPU 101 within a preset time-out time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main control CPU 101 is normally executing the main control program, clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. Become. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, the input process is executed (step S55). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first starting opening switch 161, the second starting opening switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the special winning opening switch 164, and the out ball detection switch 167, and a door opening switch, a frame opening switch, and a back set opening switch (not shown). The input information of the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. is read, the state of the information is determined, and the detected information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (step S56). In this various random number update processing, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number that do not use the initial value random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (eg 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (eg, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

  Next, the initial value updating type random number updating process is executed (step S57). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". When the value of the counter makes one round (when it reaches the value set as the initial value), the value of the random number of the initial value corresponding to the random number value of the counter made one round at the timing is set as a new initial value. To do.

  Next, the initial value random number updating process is executed (step S58). In this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds a predetermined maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (step S59). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the gaming machine are subtracted and updated. In addition, various timers, a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 171, 172, a timer for controlling the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, and the like. Includes timers used for various controls such as normal symbols, and normal electric accessories.

  Next, the second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (step S60). In the second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 62 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 62 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (step S61). In the winning prize monitoring process, the first starting opening switch 161, the second starting opening switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the large winning opening switch 164, the general winning opening switch 166, and the out ball in the above-described input processing (step S55). Based on the detection information of the detection switch 167, a switch pass inspection of the game ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, effect control including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch. Requests command transmission, etc.

  Next, prize ball control processing is executed (step S62). In this prize ball control processing, it is determined whether the prize is valid or invalid, and a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type. The communication data with the payout control board 400 is monitored by monitoring the received data from the board 400.

  Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (step S63). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 63, the random number related to the ordinary symbol lottery is acquired as the operation reserve ball information, and the maximum. The number of operation-holding balls is updated with a limit of four, and the random number related to the ordinary symbol lottery is stored.

  Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (step S64). In this normal symbol control process, in order to execute a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 175 or the normal electric accessory 622, depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol is being displayed. The process, the process during operation of the normal electric auditors product, the process during demonstration of the operation of the normal electric auditors product, and the like are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in the variable display or the fixed display.

  Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (step S65). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol operation holding ball number is extinguished by one, and the ordinary symbol Success / failure determination, symbol determination, variation pattern determination, variation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

  Next, the starting port monitoring control process is executed (step S66). In this starting opening monitoring control processing, the entrance of the game ball into the first starting opening 61 and the second starting opening 62 is monitored, and when it is detected that the gaming ball has entered, for example, the number of reserved balls Command requests for commands including information necessary for the effect control board 200 such as update, random number storage related to special symbol lottery, pre-determination for pre-reading notice, and symbol storage number are sequentially performed.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (step S67). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display device 171, 172, depending on the value of the special symbol game status, for example, a special symbol variation start process described later (see step S420 of FIG. 45 described later) The special symbol changing process (see step S430 of FIG. 45 described later) and the special symbol stop symbol display process (see step S440 of FIG. 45 described later) are executed.

  Next, the special electric auditors product control process is executed (step S68). In this process, when the special symbol lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”, as the operation process related to the special electric auditors product 642, the setting of the operation start and the operation end of the special electric auditors product 642, the large hit The opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 64 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the variation pattern selection state, and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (step S69). In the special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the special winning port 64 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning port 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (step S70). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control processing, if there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserve ball number is consumed, the command request of the symbol memory number, the determination of whether the special symbol is true or false. , The symbol determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric auditors, the setting of the demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (step S71). In this abnormality detection processing, based on the input information in the above-described input processing (step S55), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, the electric wave detection signal by the electric wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are sequentially inspected. Then, it is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request the production control board 200 to display an error, a production control command including the error information (“error production designation command”) is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection processing is executed (step S72). In this ball-passing time abnormality detection processing, when the ON signal of the prize detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, a ball-passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command ("error Performance request command ”) and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (step S73). In this game state display processing, display data such as the number of times the special electric auditors product 642 is continuously operated (specified number of rounds), the number of operation-reserved balls for normal symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. The display data for displaying the error status information detected by the above-described abnormality detection processing on the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

  Next, a steering wheel state signal inspection process is executed (step S74). In this handle state signal inspection process, the handle state signal is inspected.

  Next, the LED output process is executed (step S75). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process described above (step S85) in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously, and the error are displayed. , The abnormality detection process (step S89), the display data created by the game state display process (step S73), each special symbol display device 171, 172, normal symbol display device 175, each special symbol hold lamp 173, 174, It outputs to the universal figure holding lamp 176, the status display lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and initializes the display on these various display devices.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (step S76). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power source abnormality is detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to launch a game ball. On the other hand, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short-circuit power source abnormality is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to inhibit the game ball from being fired.

  Next, a test signal output process is executed (step S77). In this test signal output processing, error test processing is performed after creating various test data, and when an error is detected as a result, various test data are output to each test signal output port.

  Next, the solenoid output process is executed (step S78). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate the normal electric auditors product 622 and the special electric auditors product 642, based on the control data acquired in the normal symbol control process (step S82) and the special electric auditors product control process (step S86), An excitation signal is output to the electric accessory solenoids 123 and 124.

  Next, production control command transmission processing is executed (step S79). In this effect control command transmission processing, as described above, the effect control command stored in the ring buffer designated by the pointer is selected from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 as MODE data and. Each EVENT data is read out and transmitted to the effect control board 200 as described later.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (step S80). In this external information output processing, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer or a data counter via an external terminal board.

  Next, the saved contents of the register are restored and the main control CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enable state (step S81). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the main control board 100 detects a power failure (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during main processing on the main control side or during interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power failure confirmation flag is turned on. To do. After returning to the original processing, the above-described power-off processing (steps S27 to S33) is executed.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. In the process related to the special symbol game, the above-described starting opening monitoring control process (step S84), the special symbol control process (step S85), the special electric auditors product control process (step S86) and the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step S88) is applicable.

<Starting port monitoring control processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 61 is detected (step S201). When the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 61 is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (step S202).

  If the number of operation reserve balls of the first special symbol is less than 4, as a random number value related to the first special symbol game, a random number value per special symbol, a symbol random value per special symbol, a special symbol variation pattern random value, And stores each random number value in the first special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (step S203). As the update of the operation reserved sphere number of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter is incremented by 1 (step S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 61 is completed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 62 is detected (step S205). When the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 62 is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (step S206). If the number of operation reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4, as a lottery random number value related to the second special symbol game, a special symbol random number value, a special symbol per symbol random value and a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value are acquired. Then, each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (step S207). As the update of the operation reserved sphere number of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere number counter is incremented by 1 (step S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 62 is completed.

  Next, whether or not there is an update of the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, that is, the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in step S204 or step S208. It is determined whether or not (step S209). When the number of operation reserve balls is updated (step S209), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation reserve balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and the main information storage unit 180 is generated. (Step S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether it is the pre-determination timing (step S211). If it is the pre-judgment timing (step S211), the random number per special symbol is read from the hit random number buffer of the reserved n storage area, and the pre-judgment is made (step S212). A success / failure pre-determination command including the information (presence / absence pre-determination number) of this pre-determination result is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S213).

  The special symbol per symbol random number value is read from the hit symbol random number buffer of the reserved n storage area, and symbol preliminary determination is performed (step S214). A symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S215). Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and variation pattern pre-determination is performed (step S216). A variation pattern pre-determination command including the information of the preliminary determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S217).

<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing>
In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (step S88) shown in FIG. 41, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, for the special symbol side which satisfies the fluctuation start condition, a special symbol described later. The fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as an example.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step S301). Next, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, that is, the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for variation)" It is determined whether or not (step S302).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is "0" (step S303), and if the number of holding balls is not "0", the variation start condition of the second special symbol is Considering that it has been established, after setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables and RAM storage area used in the subsequent processing) (step S304), the second special symbol side The process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It Details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43 described later.

  On the other hand, if the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is "0", it is determined whether the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" (step S305). Here, if the number of holding balls is not “0”, it is considered that the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (various tables used in the subsequent processing After setting the address and the address of the RAM storage area (step S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310) on the first special symbol side.

  If the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not both satisfied (steps S301, S302, S305), the execution of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (step S310) is omitted.

<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process>
In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310), referring to the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in step S304 or step S306, the fluctuation start of this time Execute the process of the target special symbol side. In addition, the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, since the processing content is almost the same, except for special cases, is the process of the first special symbol side, the process of the second special symbol side The description will be made collectively without distinguishing whether there is.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation holding balls on the side of the special symbol which is the target of the variation start this time (step S311). A symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S312). Next, access the special symbol reservation storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of the variation start this time, and the random number per special symbol stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area), per special symbol Symbol random number value, special symbol variation pattern random number value is read in order, these random number values, special symbol appropriateness determination process (step S320) described later, symbol determination process (step S330), variation pattern selection process (FIG. 46 described later). For use in step S423), it is transferred to the special symbol validity determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S313). As the update of the pending storage area, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is sequentially shifted to the pending 1 storage area to the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S314). .

  Next, a special symbol hit / miss determination process is executed (step S320). In the special symbol win / loss determination process, first, a special symbol win / loss table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability changing state, the winning probability lottery table with a high probability is obtained, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the winning probability lottery table with a low probability is obtained. Next, a random number per special symbol is read from the special symbol winning / discarding determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Based on the random number per special symbol, referring to the special symbol win / loss lottery table, the win / fail judgment of the special symbol is executed. A value (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, deviating data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the hit determination is stored as a special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Next, a symbol determination process is executed (step S330). In the symbol determination process, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number (variation-added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit determination. The stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined symbol group (7 patterns of symbol groups A to G), and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability variation on of special symbol / probability variation off of special symbol). / Ordinary symbol probability variation ON / Normal symbol probability variation OFF 4 patterns), a total of 28 patterns are determined. It should be noted that if the result of the hit / miss determination is out of alignment, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination corresponds to a small hit (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination corresponds to a big hit (step S342). If the result of the hit / miss determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S346, while if the result of the hit / miss determination is no, the process proceeds to step S349.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in step S330, as a gaming state after the special game, whether to activate the probability varying function of the special symbol It is determined whether or not (step S343). That is, if the type of the symbol group (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to add the probability variation function, and the probability variation operation data (ST number of times) is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180. ) While storing "64H", if the type of symbol group indicates a normal symbol, it is determined not to give the probability variation function, and probability variation non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability variation counter. (Step S344). The determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in step S330, as the gaming state after the special game, the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated is determined (step S345), and the number of times the electric chow support function is activated is determined. Yes (step S346). This determination result (the number of times of operation of the variable time shortening function (hereinafter, referred to as “variable time shortening number information”) and the number of times of operation of the electric chow support function (hereinafter referred to as “number of times of easy entry state”) It is stored in the corresponding time zone storing area and the easy entry state number storing area of the main information storage means 180.

  Next, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors product 642 is set based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type, small hit type) determined in step S330 (step S347). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the prescribed number of rounds of the round game (10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds in the present embodiment), the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 64 (in the present embodiment, , 30 seconds, 1.8 seconds) and the like.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game is set (step S348). In the above description, the special variation state is determined according to the big hit symbol, but even in the case of the small hit, the variation pattern selection state can be changed to the special one in step S348. Good. Next, returning to the flow, based on the type of symbol group determined in step S330, the demonstration effect time of the special game (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) is set (step S349). Next, the special symbol appropriateness determination region and the special symbol determination region of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol appropriateness determination process (step S320) and the symbol determination process (step S330) are cleared (step S351). The special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (standby)" to "01H (start of variation)" (step S351).

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process (step S85) shown in FIG. 44 will be described. First, it is determined whether the special electric auditors product 642 is not in operation, that is, whether the special electric auditors product game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (step S401). Next, when the special electric auditors product 642 is not in operation (step S401), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (step S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)", to execute the process related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol control table (addresses and RAM storage of various tables used in the subsequent process) Area address) is set (step S403), and the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410) is performed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)", to execute the process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent process And the RAM storage area address) is set (step S404), and the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410) is performed.

  In the special symbol control general-purpose processing described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above step S403 or step S404, the special subject to change this time Although the process of the symbol side will be executed, since the method of processing is the same between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless otherwise specified, is it the process of the first special symbol side? , Will be collectively described without distinguishing whether or not the processing is on the side of the second special symbol. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing will be described later.

<Special symbol control general-purpose processing>
In the special symbol control general-purpose process (step S410) shown in FIG. 45, a branch process (step S411 to step) for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status (“01H”, “02H”, “03H”) S414) is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side which is the target of the change this time is not 0 (step S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (step S411), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (step S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H", shift to the special symbol variation start process (step S420). Details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 46 described later. On the other hand, if the special symbol game status is not “01H” in step S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changing)” (step S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H", it moves to the special symbol changing process (step S430). Details of this special symbol changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described later. If the special symbol game status is not "02H" in step S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stopped symbol display)" (step S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H", the process moves to the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (step S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process will be described with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

<Special symbol fluctuation start processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 46, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the win / loss lottery, the winning symbol, the number of holdings, the type of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (step S421). Next, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S422). With reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, based on the special symbol variation pattern random value, one is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S423).

  Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (step S424). As the setting of the variation start of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 155 (step S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (step S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a variation pattern designation command and a symbol designation command are sequentially generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (step S427). The special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (step S428).

<Processing during special symbol fluctuation>
First, as shown in FIG. 47, in order to perform variable display of special symbols, display pattern number switching processing of special symbols is executed (step S431). In this display pattern number switching process, the display pattern number data of the special symbol is updated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in the LED output process (step S76) to display the special symbol in a variable display or confirmed display, and the predetermined pattern is output. In the special symbol display device which is changing and displayed for each switching time, a specific display section blinks or individual LEDs of the display section are sequentially turned on to perform display indicating that it is changing.

  Next, whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the variable time of the special symbol has ended (step S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is over, the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 is set (step S433). Next, a variation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S434).

  Next, "125" which is data corresponding to 500 ms as the confirmed display time is stored in the special symbol game timer (step S435). The "confirmed display time" is the time during which the stop symbols are definitely stopped and displayed when the special symbols are changed and stopped. Special symbol game status transitions from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during stop symbol display)" (step S436).

<Special symbol stop symbol display processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 48, whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (step S441) ). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over, the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying stopped symbol)" to "00H (standby)" (step S442).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit / miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data “55H” (step S443). If the hit determination data is a big hit data, the stop of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (step S444), the stop of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol (step S445), the stop of the electric chew support function (step S446) , In order.

  Next, as the start demonstration setting process of the special game, the start demonstration display time is set and a production control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration production is generated (step S447). Next, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (step S448). The special electric auditors game status changes from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (step S449). In order to clear the content of the hit / miss determination flag, "00H" is set (step S450).

  On the other hand, if the hit determination data is not the big hit data (step S443), it is determined whether the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating (step S451). As shown in FIG. 49, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (step S451), the probability variation counter of the main information storage unit 180 is set to 1 as the amount of variation of the special symbol this time. Subtract (step S452). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation counter is zero, the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (step S454). On the other hand, when the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero, step S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (step S455). When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is in operation, the hour / hour counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the consumed amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the hour / hour counter is zero (step S457). If the hour / hour counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the special symbol hour / short state has been reached, and the operation of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (step S458). On the other hand, when the hour / hour counter after subtraction is not zero, step S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power cable support function is operating (step S459). When the electric choo support function is in operation, 1 is subtracted from the easy entry state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the amount of change in the number of times of change of the special symbol this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-ball-in state count counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-ball-in state count counter is zero, it is determined that the number of times the easy-ball-in state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric choo support function is stopped (step S462). On the other hand, if the easily entered ball count counter after subtraction is not zero, step S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S463.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (step S463). The variation pattern selection state is updated (step S464). Specifically, by referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number, and the end number is set. When it has reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, a production control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in steps S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is a command of the main information storage means 180. The data is stored in the storage area (step S465). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small symbol data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (step S466). When the small hit data is stored, as a small hit game start demo setting process, a start demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration effect is generated. (Step S467). Next, the special electric accessory game game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "02H (small hit game)" (step S468). "00H" is set to clear the content of the hit / miss determination flag (step S469).

  On the other hand, when the small hit data “33H” is not stored in the special symbol determination flag, that is, when the deviation data “00H” is stored in the special symbol determination flag, the execution of steps S467 to S469 is omitted. In addition, when the special symbol determination flag is the outlier data, the process of clearing the content of the flag is not performed because "00H" is originally stored as the outlier data.

<Special electric accessory control processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product game status is "01H (special game: big hit)" (step S501). If the special electric auditors game status is "01H", the special game processing is executed in the subsequent processing. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is operating (step S502). When the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642 (step S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 642 is the timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric auditors product 642, an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (step S504). ). On the side of the effect control board 200, a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designation command. The operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S505), and as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, the processing of steps S506 to S510 is executed.

  As a process during operation of the special electric auditors product 642, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of game balls has entered the special winning opening 64 (step S506), and the operation time of the special electric auditors product 642 (open time) ) Has elapsed (step S507). At this time, when the game balls enter the special winning opening 64 by the maximum number of winnings or when the operation time of the special electric auditors product 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric auditors product 642 is stopped (step S508). It is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 642 has reached a preset specified number of rounds (step S509). If the number of continuous operations does not reach the specified number of rounds, the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 642 is incremented by 1 (step S510).

  On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 has reached the specified number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S511 shown in FIG. 52, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. , An effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (step S511).

  Next, the probability variation number information set in step S344 is stored in the probability variation number counter (step S512). The variable time reduction frequency information set in step S345 is stored in the time reduction frequency counter (step S513). The easy-ball-on state count information set at step S346 is stored in the easy-ball-in state count counter (step S514).

  Next, with reference to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in step S343, it is determined whether or not the probability variation number information stored in the probability variation number counter is the probability variation function data (“64H”). Yes (step S515). If the probability variation number information is the probability variation function data, the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is started (step S516). On the other hand, when the probability variation frequency information is not the probability variation function data (NO in step S515), the execution of step S516 is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the variation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction number counter is variation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (step S517). If it is the variation time reduction function operation data, the operation of the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is started (step S518). On the other hand, if it is not the variation time reduction function operation data, the execution of step S518 is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information on the number of easy-to-enter states stored in the easy-to-enter-state number counter is the electric-chu support function operation data (data other than "00H") (step S519). If the data is the electric-tube support function operation data, the operation of the electric-tube support function is started (steps S520 to S522). That is, the operation start of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (step S520), the operation start of the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol (step S521), the operation start of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric auditors product 622 (step S522), in order. Run. On the other hand, if it is not the electric power support function operation data, the execution of steps S520 to S522 is omitted.

  Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S523). Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in steps S512 to S523 described above is generated, and this is generated by the main information storage unit 180. In the command storage area (step S524). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state designation command. The special electric auditors' game game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (step S525).

  On the other hand, if the special electric auditors product game status is not "01H" (step S501), the process proceeds to step S530, and the special electric auditors product game status is "02H (special game: small hit game)". It is determined whether or not (step S530). If the special electric auditors game status is "02H", the small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 642 is in operation (step S531). If the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S532). On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 642 is operating, the execution of step S532 is omitted.

  Next, as the processing during the operation of the special electric auditors product 642, it is determined whether or not the game balls have entered the maximum winning opening 64 by the maximum winning number (step S533), and the operation time of the special electric auditors product 642. It is determined whether (opening time) has elapsed (step S534). At this time, when the game balls have entered the special winning opening 64 by the maximum number of winnings or when the operation time of the special electric auditors product 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric auditors product 642 is stopped (step S535).

  Next, as the end demo setting process for the small hit game, the end demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (step S536). Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in step S347 (step S537). Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in this step S537 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. (Step S538). This game state designating command is used on the side of the effect control board 200, for example, for determining the timing of the effect mode transition and for identifying the effect mode of the transition destination. The special electric auditors product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (step S539).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of processing on the side of the production control board 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. In the following, the production control program is mainly the main subject, but the main subject will be omitted as appropriate. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 is a reset start process (including the main process on the effect control side) that is executed when the effect control CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt on the effect control side that is activated at regular intervals. Processing, reception interrupt processing of the effect control command executed upon receiving the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and activation upon the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time defined in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern. It includes a lamp effect interruption process that is performed and an image control command transmission interrupt process that is activated at regular intervals.

  A priority level is set for each interrupt process (exception process), which indicates the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur simultaneously. In the present embodiment, "reset start processing by power supply reset (FIG. 54): highest priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities (FIG. 54): highest priority" → "reception control command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 62)" : Level 7 "→" WDT (runaway detection) reset start process (Fig. 54): Level 3 "→" Image control command transmission interrupt process (Fig. 55): Level 2 "→" Production control timer interrupt process ( 61): Level 1 "and the like are prioritized in order of priority level. The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is performed by, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the effect control CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the effect control CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Activated when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of interrupt processing described above are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the production control side main processing, basically, the processing is performed after setting all the interrupts disabled or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, the main process is interrupted and each interrupt process is executed. In each interrupt process, if there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) during execution of the interrupt process, as long as it is an interrupt process with a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, in principle In addition, while the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process proceeds in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or low priority levels are prohibited. All interrupt processing returns to the main processing on the production control side with all interrupts enabled. The priority level (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by the register setting of the interrupt controller described above.

<Reset start processing>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of a reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, a reset caused by various abnormalities, or a reset caused by WDT (when a runaway is detected) is started, and after the security check of the effect control CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after step S801 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a leading address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (step S801). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (step S802).

  Next, as a basic setting related to hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the effect control CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (step S803). Further, the memory area in the effect control RAM 203 is initialized (step S804). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by clearing 0 is performed for a variable without an initial value. The effect control CPU201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the effect control ROM202 to the effect control RAM203.

  Next, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (step S805). Next, of the various errors set in advance for each model, a process of setting the type of error that should be valid for the model is executed (step S806). Further, a turn-off request is made to turn off all the effect lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10 and board lamp 25) (step S807). A watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the effect control CPU 201 (step S808).

  Next, effect control side main processing is executed (step S809). Details of the effect control side main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 55. It should be noted that, although it is normally impossible to return to the reset start process when the process shifts to the effect control side main process in step S809 described above, due to occurrence of a program bug or the like, the reset start process is returned to by chance. In this case, the power consumption is changed to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is lower than that in the normal operation.

<Main processing on the production control side>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the effect control side main processing (step S809) shown in FIG.

  First, an address (starting address where the effect control program is expanded) for starting checking whether or not the effect control program is correctly expanded in the effect control RAM 203 in the main process of the effect control side is acquired (step S811). ). Next, all interrupts are permitted, that is, activation of various interrupt processes is permitted (step S812).

  Next, the device initialization operation is executed (step S813). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when reset is started), and is necessary for controlling the operation of the movable accessory by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

  Next, in order to restart the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S814). At this time, when the effect control CPU 201 is normally executing the effect program, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the effect control CPU 201 within a preset timeout time, so that the watchdog timer Is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input port check processing is executed (step S815). In this input port check processing, the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) is read every time an interrupt occurs in the port input / output processing (step S1112) in the effect control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 61) described later. As a result of monitoring and monitoring a plurality of times (for example, four times), if all the input port states are "1", the signal level is changed to "1 (H level)" and all input port states are "0". In the case of, the signal level is changed to "0 (L level)", and when the state of the input port is other than that, the signal level is not changed (this determines the input signal).

  Next, an error effect management process is executed (step S816). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). Further, in the error effect management process, an error management timer is set to an initial value (error effect time) to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (step S1120) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is ended.

  Next, effect button supervisory control processing is executed (step S817). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance notice effect is incorporated during the pattern change, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation valid time is monitored, and a plurality of preset button advance notice effects are set according to the button advance notice effect. The content of the effect according to the input state of the effect button 15 is determined from among the kinds of effect contents. It should be noted that the button input operation itself by the player is monitored in the port input processing (step S1112) in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, and in the effect button monitoring control processing, a flag regarded as a button valid operation and effect switching. It is determined whether or not the flag for is established and execution control of the effect based on the button press is performed.

  Next, advance notice lottery management processing is executed (step S818). In this notice lottery management process, the notice production pattern that defines the contents of the notice production that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation production pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). (Preliminary production number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260. An image control command for designating this notice effect number on the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage means 260. At this time, when the accessory notice effect pattern (feature notice effect number) is selected as the notice effect pattern, a feature request is generated, and in the subsequent device management process (step S819), the movable accessory effect is generated. Drive pattern is specified. In addition, in the present embodiment, all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (announcement effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative design are not drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop process efficiency is increased. In order to improve, the configuration is such that the notice production is divided for each generation time (for example, variation start stage, reach generation stage, variation stop stage, effective operation of the production button 15), and lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes. Has become. At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the variation start stage of the decorative pattern, it is necessary to synchronize with the variation start of the decorative pattern (send the image control command immediately), so the lottery is performed in the main loop process described above. Run.

  Next, device management processing is executed (step S819). In this device management processing, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in a command analysis processing (step S820) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern) stored in the effect control ROM 202. , Drive pattern), pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamps 10 and 25, lamp data associated with each one frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. Note that in the present embodiment, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing processing when the effect display device 70 draws at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps). Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. Become. On the other hand, in the production control timer interrupt processing described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the production lamps 10 and 25 are turned off or the operation of the movable accessory is stopped. Then, the control of the target device ends.

  Next, command analysis processing (step S820) is executed. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this effect control command is read out and this effect control command is read out. Perform effect control processing corresponding to the type of effect control command. Details of this command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 56 described later.

  During the loop process of the effect main process of this cycle, it is determined whether or not the analysis (hereinafter, referred to as “command analysis”) regarding the effect control command is executed (step S821). When the command analysis is being executed, the process returns to step S814, and steps S814 to S821 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed (step S822). In this production lottery random number update processing, production lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variation production pattern random number, a notice production pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing details of the command analysis process (step S820) shown in FIG. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command held in the output port of the main control board 100 is loaded into the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 as described below, and the effect control command is displayed. If is captured and stored, the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S831). When the game state designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (step S832). In this effect state transition process, a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. Details of this effect state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57 described later.

  Next, it is determined whether a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S833). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a preliminary determination command. If this hold-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the hold information management process (step S834). In this hold information management processing, the symbol storage number command or the pre-determination command is read from the effect control information storage unit 260, pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold display unit (FIG. A process for updating the display number and display mode (display color etc.) of the reserved image displayed in (not shown) is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S835). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored, the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (step S836). In this variation effect content determination processing, when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and when the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command Executes a process for ending the pattern variation effect being executed. Details of this variation effect content determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58 described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit production related command is stored in the command storage area of the production control information storage unit 260 (step S837). Here, the big hit production related commands include a big hit start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a big hit end demonstration effect command. If the big hit production related command is stored, the process shifts to the big hit production content determination processing (step S838). In this jackpot effect content determination processing, processing for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is executed. Details of this jackpot effect content determination processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit production related command is stored in the command storage area of the production control information storage unit 260 (step S839). Here, the small hit production related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. When the small hit production related command is stored, the processing shifts to the small hit production content determination processing (step S840). In this small hit production content determination processing, processing for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S841). When this error effect designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (step S842). In this error effect content determination process, an error effect designation command is read from the effect control information storage unit 260, and an error effect for notifying an error state is displayed by the image display of the effect display device 70 or the light emission mode of the effect lamps 10 and 25. Determine the pattern.

  If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 in steps S831, S833, S835, S837, S839, and S841, the command analysis process ends. Since the loop processing (steps S814 to S822) of the main processing on the effect control side is synchronized with the image display cycle (1 frame = 16 ms) of the image control CPU 301, the command analysis processing in step S821 and the effect lottery in step S822. The random number update process is repeatedly executed, and if it exceeds 16 ms, the process returns to step S814.

<Production state transition processing>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing details of the effect state transition processing (step S832) shown in FIG.

  First, the content of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 is analyzed, and the information regarding the variation pattern selection state included in the content of this command is acquired (step S901). Next, based on the information on the variation pattern selection state acquired in step S901, it is determined whether or not the opportunity to shift the effect mode has arrived (step S902). When the timing of transition to the effect mode has arrived, the transition setting to the predetermined effect mode is performed in step S903 and the subsequent steps. In addition, as a trigger for the transition of the production mode, in principle, it is linked with the probability variation function after the end of the special game, the variation time shortening function, the operation of the electric choo support function, and the transition timing of the variation pattern selection state. For example, at the end of the special game or when the end number of times of the variation pattern selection state is completed. In addition, the final number of times of the variation pattern selection state is the number of times related to the variation number of the special symbol.

  First, it is determined whether the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low-probability normal variation state α (step S903). When the transfer destination is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α, the normal effect mode Mα is set as the transfer destination of the effect mode (step S904). When shifting to the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S905). In the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background image representing, for example, “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol change. On the other hand, if the transition destination is not the low-probability normal variation state α (step S903), it is determined whether the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high-probability short-time variation state β (step S906). If the transition destination is the high-probability time-shortening variation state β, the probability variation production mode Mβ is set as the production mode transition destination (step S907). When the probability variation effect mode A is entered, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S908). In the probability variation effect mode Mβ, a probability variation background image representing, for example, “fortress” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is not the high-probability short-time variation state β (step S906), it is determined whether the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high-probability special variation state γ (step S909). ). If the destination is the high-probability special variation state γ, the special effect mode Mγ is set as the destination of the effect mode (step S910). Next, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag of the effect control information storage unit 260 is on (step S911). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is executed. If the special continuous effect flag is on, a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S912). In the special effect mode Mγ, a special background image representing, for example, “starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol change. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is off, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S913). In the special effect mode Mγ, a probability-varying background image representing, for example, “castle” (substantially the same background image as in the probability-varying effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Next, an image control command for instructing the display of the effect contents (background image) determined by the process is generated and stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S921). Further, as the change of the effect mode, there is a change determined by the effect control board 200 side, which is not due to the game state of the main control board 100. For example, when the normal game state (low probability / low base) on the main control board 100 side is continuously played a predetermined number of times, or when a pre-reading lottery for executing a special effect mode is won, the power is turned on. There is a case where a timer value for measuring the elapsed time of or the RTC circuit determines that the predetermined time has come and executes the special effect.

<Variable performance content determination processing>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing details of the variable effect content determination processing (step S836) shown in FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S931). When the variation start command is stored, the content of this variation start command (variation pattern designation command, variation addition symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) is analyzed, and the result of the win / loss lottery included in the content of this command is analyzed. , Information indicating a symbol group, a variation pattern (variation time), a game state, etc. is acquired (step S932). In addition, this acquisition information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the effect control information storage unit 260.

  Next, a variation effect pattern selection process is executed (step S933). In this variation effect pattern selection processing, based on the variation pattern information acquired in step S932 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition processing in step S832, the variation effect pattern table is acquired and effect lottery random number generation means is generated. A random effect pattern random number value is acquired from 210, and any of the variable effect patterns is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns. The variation effect pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the notice effect, etc. are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260. A lamp effect number corresponding to the selected fluctuating effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (step S934). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection processing, based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in step S932, the combination of the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols to be finally stopped (left symbol / middle symbol / right symbol) is selected by lottery. To decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260.

  Next, as the update of the look-ahead information storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260, the holding ball information stored in the holding 2 storage area to the holding 4 storage area is shifted to a lower holding storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is changed. It is cleared to zero (step S935).

  Based on the effect information acquired in steps S933 to S935, an image control command (variation effect start command) required to start changing the decorative pattern is generated, and the image control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260. It is set (step S939).

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command is not stored (step S931), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S940). When the fluctuation stop command is stored (step S940), the contents of the fluctuation stop command are analyzed and the symbol stop information included in the contents of this command is acquired (step S941). An image control command (fluctuation effect stop command) required to stop changing the decorative pattern is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S942).

<Big hit performance content determination processing>
59 and 60 are flowcharts showing details of the big hit effect content determination processing (step S836) shown in FIG. 56.

  First, it is determined whether or not a start demo command is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S1001). If the start demo command is stored, the contents of the start demo command are analyzed, and the information included in the contents of this command, such as the jackpot type, is acquired (step S1002). It should be noted that this acquisition information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage unit 260. Next, the number of consecutive holidays counter for counting the number of consecutive holidays is updated (step S1003). Specifically, if the big hit this time is a big hit in a normal state (referred to as "first hit"), "1" is set to the number of consecutive villas counter, and if it is a villa, the number of consecutive villas counter is set to " 1 ”is added.

  Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process for determining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demonstration effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern) is executed (step S1004). In this big hit production pattern selection processing, a big hit production pattern table (not shown) is obtained, and a big hit production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generation means 210 to select one of the big hit production patterns. The production pattern is determined by lottery. The big hit effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260. This big hit production pattern number includes, for example, a start demo pattern number, a round production pattern number, and an end demo pattern number.

  Next, the on-hold vacation resort effect determination process is executed (step S1005). In this on-holding continuous play effect determination process, when there is a holding that becomes a big hit in the game state after the big hit (especially the probability variation game state) in the holding that exists when the big hit game is executed, the holding inside series Whether or not to execute the villa effect is determined, and if it is determined to execute the in-hold villa effect, the special continuous effect flag is turned on and the villa effect pattern is selected.

  Next, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (step S1006). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when a hold-in-long-end resort effect (special continuous effect) is executed, a normal start demo effect pattern and a normal end demo effect pattern are converted into a special start demo effect pattern and a special end demo effect pattern. Replace. In addition, in the present embodiment, the target of the prefetching determination in the on-holding condominium production exists at the start time (at the end of the fluctuation) of the special game when the preceding operation holding ball becomes a big hit. It is the subsequent operation holding ball. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball generated during the special game is the specific hold, the in-hold-and-long-seat production determination process (step S1005) and the replacement process (step S1006) are not executed, but during the special game. When the specific hold occurs in the special game, it may be configured to execute the in-hold game production effect determination process and the replacement process even during the special game, and replace the big hit effect data set at the start of the special game.

  The start demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 is transferred to the start demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 to start the start demonstration effect. Is set to start (step S1007).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the round effect designation command is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S1011). When the round effect designation command is stored (step S1007), the content of the round effect designation command is analyzed, and information indicating the number of rounds included in the content of this command and the number of winnings to the special winning opening 64 is displayed. It is acquired (step S1012). It should be noted that this acquisition information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage unit 260. Next, based on the information acquired in the above step S1012, the round number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1013), and the special winning number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1014). . In the present embodiment, “14” prize balls are paid out each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 64. Therefore, by multiplying the number of winnings into the special winning opening 64 by “14”, The number of winning prize balls is calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage unit 260 is on (step S1015). The pseudo count flag is a flag which is turned on when executing a pseudo count effect in which the number of rounds and the number of won prize balls in the previous special game are added to the number of rounds and the number of won prize balls in the later special game to notify. Is. When the pseudo count flag is on, that is, when the round effect (pseudo count effect) in the subsequent big hit is scheduled to be executed, the round number pseudo addition process is executed (step S1016). In this round number pseudo addition process, the execution number of the round game stored in the round number counter (round number: 1R to 10R) is set to the execution number of the round game executed in the previous special game (round number: 10R). to add. Thereby, in the special continuous effect, the round game of the first round in the subsequent special game is notified as the eleventh round game.

  Next, the pseudo prize acquisition pseudo addition process is executed (step S1017). In the pseudo prize winning number addition processing, the number of winnings to the special winning opening in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the special winning number counter. As a result, in the special continuous production, the number of award balls acquired in the subsequent special game is notified as the total number of award balls acquired in the previous special game and the subsequent special game.

  The round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 together with the numerical values of the round number counter and the big winning number counter is rounded by the effect control information storage unit 260. It is transferred to the effect storage area and the start of the round effect is set (step S1018).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the end demo command is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S1021). When the end demo command is stored, the content of the end demo command is analyzed and the information included in the content of this command is acquired (step S1022). It should be noted that this acquisition information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage unit 260. Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous production flag of the production control information storage unit 260 is on (step S1023), and it is determined whether or not to execute the in-holding continuous entertainment production. When the special continuous effect flag is on, the value of the round number counter (round number) and the value of the big prize number counter (large prize number) are temporarily stored in the big hit storage area ahead of the effect control information storage means 260. It is stored (step S1024). This is because when the big hit of this time corresponds to the big hit of the previous one in the special continuous production, the final round number and the number of big winnings in the big hit of the previous one are pseudo addition processing (steps S1016 and S1017) in the subsequent big hit production. This is because it is planned to be used in ()) and is stored as the record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo addition processing in steps S1016 and S1017, the numerical values (round number and big winning number) stored in the big hit storage area are added. Next, the round number counter and the big winning number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 are cleared (steps S1025 and S1026).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage unit 260 is on (step S1027). If the pseudo count flag is on, the pseudo count flag is turned off (step S1028). Next, it is determined whether or not the on-hold holiday condominium effect flag of the effect control information storage unit 260 is on (step S1035). If the on-holding holiday inn effect flag is on, the on-holding holiday inn effect flag of the effect control information storage unit 260 is turned off (step S1036).

  Next, in steps S1004 and S1006, the end demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 is transferred to the end demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, The start of the end demonstration effect is set (step S1037). Based on the effect information acquired in steps S1005, S1007, S1018, and S1037, an image control command required for the big hit effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260 (step S1038). .

<Timer control side interrupt processing>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular intervals, and is executed so as to interrupt the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the effect control CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the effect control RAM 203, and then the processing from step S1111 is sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt processing, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher such as effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupt are permitted (step S1111).

  Next, port input / output processing is executed (step S1112). In this port input / output process, the I / O port circuit 204 is used to execute input process of input data and output process of output data. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 are read and stored as input information. On the other hand, in the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204.

  Next, a device control data output process is executed (step S1113). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (step S819) described above and set in the drive data storage area of the effect control information storage unit 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, performance timer update processing is executed (step S1114). In this effect timer update processing, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (for example, 1 ms). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative design, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the notice effect, and the like. This production timer manages the time schedule in the fluctuating production pattern, and the time management such as the driving timing of the movable accessory and the lighting timing of the production lamps 10 and 25 is managed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (step S1113) and the lamp data update process (step S1118) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Next, the button control timer updating process is executed (step S1115). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Next, the task control counter updating process is executed (step S1117). In this task control counter updating process, the value (“0” to “15”) of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", 1 is added, and if the value of the task counter is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can take a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and a ramp control task (lamp data update processing of step S1118) and a runaway monitoring task are assigned according to the value of the task counter. (Image CPU runaway monitoring process of step S1119), error management task (error management timer updating process of step S1120) and other processes are executed. In the present embodiment, one of the values (“0” to “15”) of the task counter is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and another one value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match the minimum unit of 16 ms for the switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. The minimum unit of the switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

  Next, a lamp data update process is executed (step S1118). In this lamp data update processing, lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management processing (step S819) described above. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit for switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs the converted data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in a manner synchronized with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data updating process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. It should be noted that this ramp data update processing is executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the ramp control task) in the above-mentioned task control counter update processing (step S1117) (that is, at a 16 ms cycle). Processing to be executed).

  Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (step S1119). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 800 to 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control is performed. It is determined that the image control CPU 301 of the board 300 is out of control, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the image control CPU 301 occurs. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time. The image CPU runaway monitoring process is a process executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter updating process (step S1117) described above. .

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (step S1120). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the above-described error effect management process (step S817) is subtracted and updated. The error management timer process is a process executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter updating process (step S1117) described above. After all interrupts are enabled and the saved contents of the register are restored, the effect control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<Image control command transmission interrupt processing>
FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the transmission interruption process of the image control command. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at preset constant intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage unit 260 is checked (step S1131). Next, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (step S1132), and it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (step S1133). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (step S1133), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (step S1134). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit (not shown) designated as the output destination (step S1135). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data stored in step S1135 described above) is cleared (step S1136). Next, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (step S1137). The transmission interrupt process of the image command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<Roulette reach production>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment including the game board 5A, the drum-type effect display device 71 is used instead of the liquid crystal display device 70 as the effect display device that displays the decorative pattern and the effect image. Further, in addition to the drum-type effect display device 71 which is the main decorative symbol display device, the light guide plate 72 can be used as the sub decorative symbol display device.

  The display of the decorative symbols and effect images by these decorative symbol display devices (drum type effect display device 71 and light guide plate 72) is controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly effect control CPU 201). Regarding the detailed functions of the effect control board 200 such as determination of effect contents, the contents described with reference to FIG. 26 and the like for the pachinko machine 1 including the liquid crystal display device 70 can be applied.

  In the following, a roulette reach effect, which is one of the effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 including such a game board 5A, will be described.

  The effect control board 200, when the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect determination means 225 corresponds to the roulette reach effect (or execution of the effect corresponding to the roulette reach effect based on the variation effect pattern). Is determined), the effect is executed according to the variation of the special symbol. Note that the roulette reach effect includes not only the variable display of the decorative pattern but also the illumination control of the backlight of the drum-type effect display device 71 and the light source of the light guide plate 72 as described later, and therefore, the corresponding variable effect pattern and It may be regarded as an effect realized by combining the notice effect pattern determined by the notice effect determining unit 226 based on the variation effect pattern. The same applies to other effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5A described later (for example, a seven reach effect and a vision chance effect described later).

  63 to 66 are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the effect display device in the roulette reach effect. 63 to 66, the manner of symbols displayed in the symbol display area 710 in each process of the roulette reach effect is illustrated in time series. The flow of the display form in the roulette reach effect will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. 63 to 66, the 7 symbols displayed on each reel 711 (711a, 711b, 711c) of the drum type effect display device 71 are shown in white, while the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72 are shown. Is shown with a diagonal line on the right.

  In the roulette reach effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), a stop type that does not mean a hit (for example, “miss eye” in the figure) is temporarily stopped while the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner by the reel 711 (hereinafter, “stop”). , Also referred to as “temporary stop”). In FIG. 63 (A), symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 63B and 64 to 66 below.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), all reels 711 rotate at high speed in the forward direction (from the top to the bottom in the figure), and thereafter, in accordance with the development pattern of the roulette reach effect. The reel 711 is temporarily stopped (re-stopped) again in various stop forms.

  Here, the roulette reach effect of this example includes a plurality of development patterns having different expectations with respect to the final effect result (hit / miss, number of lines achieved, etc.). Specifically, for example, the lowest expectations are given. It is assumed that a “standard pattern”, a “chance pattern” having a higher expectation than the standard pattern and a lower expectation than the intense heat pattern, and a “extreme heat pattern” having the highest expectation degree are prepared.

  67 (A) to 67 (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a stop type of reel re-stop for each development pattern. 67 (A) to 67 (C), for each development pattern, an example of a middle-stage stop type (roll-out) rule when the reel 711 is stopped again after the high speed rotation of FIG. 67 (B) is shown. ing.

  Specifically, for example, in the case of FIG. 67 (A) showing the standard pattern, the stop symbols in the left column and the right column may be arbitrary (“any”), and in the middle row of the middle row, the final pattern by the effect is shown. In any case where the result is a hit / miss, it is defined that the design of the array number 9 (a blank design in which the top and bottom are sandwiched by seven designs when referring to FIG. 21) is stopped. However, the left column and the right column are optional, but avoid confusion due to having the same shape as the stop type in other development patterns, or at the time of the re-stop, 7 symbol alignments are established on either the upper or lower line. In order to avoid this, it is preferable to set a predetermined limit.

  67 (B) and 67 (C) are omitted, but as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), a re-stop type of the reel 711 after high-speed rotation for each development pattern. Since the difference is provided, it is possible to raise the player's interest in what kind of symbol is stopped again, and it can be expected to enhance the interest in the roulette reach production. Further, in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), the same stop form is defined regardless of the final effect result (hit / miss) by the effect, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. In at least one of the development patterns, different stop-type rules may be determined depending on the effect result. In this case, since it is possible to prepare a case in which the hit result can be estimated immediately when the player stops again in a specific stop mode, an effect of further increasing the interest of the player can be expected.

  FIG. 64 (A) shows an example of a stop type when all reels 711 are stopped again after high speed rotation when the standard pattern roulette reach effect is selected. The re-stop type of FIG. 64 (A) is in accordance with the law shown in FIG. 67 (A), and specifically, so that the blank pattern of number 9 stops in the middle and middle stages (in other words, middle The 7th symbol of No. 10 is in the upper row, and the 7th symbol of No. 8 is in the middle lower row), and the middle reel 711b is stopped. Further, the stop symbols in the left and right rows are arbitrary symbols such that a 7 symbol arrangement is not formed.

  After FIG. 64 (A), the light emission effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle of the left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and thereafter, the 7 symbols However, the middle row of the light guide plate 72 is moved to the middle row of the middle row and the middle row of the right row in order at a constant speed, and after reaching the middle row of the right row, returns to the middle row of the left row and repeats the same operation as described above. The seven symbols of the light emitting area 721d (FIG. 20) and the seven symbols of the light emitting area 721f (FIG. 20) in the middle of the right column are sequentially lighted and displayed for a short time. Further, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left column, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721f in the middle row of the right column are sequentially and cyclically lit for a short time. To be done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the seven symbols in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72 are moved further in sequence and cyclically to the left column middle stage, the middle column middle stage and the right column middle stage by further increasing the speed. The seven patterns of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row on the left side of the light guide plate 72, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721f in the middle row of the right column are sequentially and cyclically for each short time. Lights up and is displayed.

  Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 that have been moving at high speed until then are stopped in the middle row middle stage. As a result, in the middle row of the symbol display area 710, the tenth 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b (FIG. 20) are in the upper row, the seven symbols of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 are in the middle row, and the middle reel 711b is in the bottom row. No. 8 7 symbols are arranged in a line to form a 7 symbol arrangement, and the player is informed of the hit.

  In addition, after this, a part or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 patterns of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of some or all of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. Also, it is possible to perform a re-lottery effect that can be expected to be promoted to win on multiple advantageous lines. By performing such re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further enhanced, and the interest in the standard pattern roulette reach effect can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final effect produced by the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the seven patterns of the light guide plate 72 that were moving at high speed are not in the middle row and middle row (for example, in the right row). Stop at the middle row or the middle row on the left row. As a result, the 7 symbols are not arranged and the player is informed of the loss.

  In this case, after this, a relief change such as moving the seven symbols in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72 to the right again at high speed may be performed, and thereafter, in the seven symbol arrangement mode shown in FIG. 64 (D). You may make it stop finally. By preparing such a relief fluctuation, it is possible to make the player expect that there may be a relief fluctuation even after the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72 that has moved at a high speed is stopped at a position other than the middle row middle stage. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in producing the standard pattern roulette reach.

  On the other hand, FIG. 65 (A) shows an example of a stop type when all reels 711 are rotated at a high speed and then re-stopped as shown in FIG. 63 (B) when the chance pattern roulette reach effect is selected. ing. The re-stop type of FIG. 65 (A) is in accordance with the law shown in FIG. 67 (B), and specifically, so that the blank pattern of No. 8 stops in the left middle stage (in other words, the upper left corner). The left reel 711a is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 9 is in the row, the 7th symbol of 7 is stopped in the lower left row, and the blank symbol of 9th is stopped in the middle middle row (in other words, 10 is in the middle upper row). No. 7 symbol, the middle reel 711b is stopped so that the No. 8 7 symbol is stopped in the middle lower stage. In addition, the stop symbol in the right column is an arbitrary symbol such that a 7 symbol arrangement is not formed.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the seven symbols of the light emitting area 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and further, FIG. 65 (B) and (C). As shown in FIG. 7, the 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72, the middle row of the right row, so that these 7 patterns perform the same movements as described above with reference to FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C). 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721f and 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left column are sequentially and cyclically lit for a short time.

  Then, when the final effect result by the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 moving at a high speed are stopped in the middle row and middle stage. As a result, in the middle row of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the 10th reel of the middle reel 711b is in the upper row, the 7th symbol of the light emitting area 721d of the middle row of the light guide plate 72 is in the middle row, and the 8th of the middle reel 711b is in the lower row. A 7-symbol alignment in which 7 symbols are arranged in a line is established, and the player is informed of the hit. After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the roulette reach effect of the chance pattern can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the seven patterns of the light guide plate 72 that has moved at high speed are other than the middle row middle row (for example, the right row middle row). Or stop in the middle row of the left row). As a result, the 7 symbols are not arranged and the player is informed of the loss. In this case as well, the relief change may be performed after this, which makes it possible for the player to hold the expectation that there may be the relief change, and thus the interest in the roulette reach production of the chance pattern. Can be increased.

  On the other hand, FIG. 66 (A) shows an example of a stop type when all reels 711 are stopped again after high speed rotation when the roulette reach effect of the intense heat pattern is selected. The re-stop type of FIG. 66 (A) is in accordance with the law shown in FIG. 67 (C), and specifically, so that the blank symbol of No. 9 stops in the middle and middle stages (in other words, middle). The middle reel 711b is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 10 is in the upper row and the 7th symbol of No. 8 is in the middle and lower rows, and the blank symbol of 8th is stopped in the right middle row (in other words, 9 is in the upper right row). No. 7 symbol, right reel 711c is stopped so that 7 symbol of No. 7 is stopped at the lower right stage. Further, the stop symbol in the left column is an arbitrary symbol such that a 7 symbol arrangement is not formed.

  Then, after FIG. 66 (A), the light emission effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the seven symbols of the light emitting area 721b in the left column middle stage of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and further, FIGS. 66 (B) and (C). As shown in FIG. 7, the 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72, the middle row of the right row, so that these 7 patterns perform the same movements as described above with reference to FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C). 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721f and 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left column are sequentially lit up and displayed for a short time.

  Then, when the final effect result by the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 that has been moving at high speed stop in the middle row of the right column. As a result, in the right column of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c (FIG. 20) is numbered 9 in the upper row, the 7th symbol in the middle row of the right column of the light guide plate 72 is placed in the middle row, and the 7th row of the right reel 711c is placed in the lower row. A 7-symbol alignment in which 7 symbols are arranged in a line is established, and the player is informed of the hit. After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed. By doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the roulette reach effect of the intense heat pattern can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72 that was moving at high speed stopped on the right side of the right middle row. As a result, the 7 symbols are not displayed in the symbol display area 710. As a result, the 7 symbols are not arranged and the player is informed of the loss. In this case as well, the relief variation may be performed after this, which makes it possible for the player to hold the expectation that there may be the relief variation, and the interest for the roulette reach production of the intense heat pattern. Can be increased.

<Seven reach production>
Next, the seven reach effect, which is one of the effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5A, will be described.

  68 and 69, when the variation production pattern determined by the variation production determination means 225 corresponds to the seven reach production (or, execution of production corresponding to the roulette reach production based on the variation production pattern). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of (when is determined).

  In FIG. 68, the reach line (vertical, horizontal or diagonal line where two hit patterns of the same kind are aligned) develops into one super reach from the normal reach to the symbol display area 710 in each process of the seven reach production. The mode of the symbols to be displayed is illustrated in time series. In addition, FIG. 69 exemplifies the manner of symbols displayed in the symbol display area in a time series in each process of the Seven Reach effect when the reach line develops from the normal reach to the two super reach. Hereinafter, the flow of the display mode in the seven reach effect will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

  First, we will explain the Seven Reach production in which the reach line develops into one super reach. The Seven Reach effect in this case is, for example, during the variable display of the decorative symbol on the reel 711, for example, the left reel 711a (FIG. 20) is the 6th dinosaur C symbol on the left middle row, and the right reel 711c is on the right middle row (FIG. 20). ) No. 11 of the dinosaur C symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach of the dinosaur C symbol is started (see FIG. 68 (A)). Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the 7th symbol of No. 8 of the middle reel 711b is temporarily stopped in the middle upper stage. In FIG. 68 (A), symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 68 (B) to (L).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the backlights of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned off, and the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c move forward at high speed. Starting to rotate, the middle reel 711b is rotated in the forward direction by one symbol together with this, whereby the 7th symbol of No. 8 on the middle reel 711b moves from the middle upper stage to the middle middle stage. The left reel 711a and the right reel 711c, after this, 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b at the timing of later-described FIG. 68 (D), FIG. 68 (G), FIG. 68 (K) or FIG. 68 (L), The light guide plate 72 is stopped at any one of the plurality of previously prepared symbol patterns so that the symbol combination does not result in a 7 symbol combination in combination with the 7 symbols which are lit and displayed.

  Then, after FIG. 68 (B), the light emission effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move in the downward direction to the upper left stage, the middle left stage, and the lower left stage, and are synchronized with this. Then, the seven symbols in the right column of the light guide plate 72 move downward at a constant speed to the upper right stage, the right middle stage, and the lower right stage, and after each of these seven symbols on the left and right reaches the lower left column and the lower right column. , The left column upper row and the right column upper row again, and the same operation as described above is repeated, so that the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) of the left column upper row of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e of the right column upper row ( 20), 7 patterns of the left column middle luminescent area 721b (FIG. 20) and 7 patterns of the right column middle luminescent area 721f (FIG. 20), and the left column lower luminescent area 721c (FIG. 20) 7 symbols and 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721g (FIG. 20) in the lower row of the right column are in order and respectively. Is ring to lighting display by briefly.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the first rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), as shown in FIG. Each of the seven symbols on the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72, which has been stopped, is stopped at the middle column on the left column and the middle column on the right column respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b of the left row middle stage of the light guide plate 72 in the left middle stage, the 7th symbol of the eighth reel 711b in the middle middle stage, the right column middle stage of the light guide plate 72 in the right middle stage The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721f are arranged in a line to form a 7 symbol group, and the player is informed of the hit.

  In addition, after this, a part or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 patterns of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of some or all of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. Also, it is possible to perform a re-lottery effect that can be expected to be promoted to win on multiple advantageous lines. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further enhanced, and the interest in the seven reach effect with one reach line can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the case where the final effect result by the effect is lost, or when the final effect result by the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second and subsequent rotations, FIG. As shown in E), each of the seven symbols in the left column and the right column of the light guide plate 72, which has been moving in the downward direction until then, is temporarily stopped in the lower column in the left column and the lower column in the right column.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), as in FIG. 68 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 and the seven symbols in the right column in the same column are synchronized with each other in the upper column, 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721a in the upper row of the left column and 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721e in the upper row of the right column, and the light emission of the middle row in the left column, so that the operation of sequentially moving to the middle row and the lower row at a constant speed is repeated. 7 symbols of the region 721b and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right column, and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721c of the lower column of the left column and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721g of the lower column of the right column are sequentially and cyclically short time respectively. Are displayed one by one. Further, at this time, the middle reel 711b rotates in the forward direction by one symbol, so that the 7th symbol of 8th of the middle reel 711b moves from the middle middle stage to the middle lower stage, and the 7th symbol of 10th of the middle reel 711b. Is displayed in the upper middle section.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), it moves downward at a constant speed until then, as shown in FIG. The respective 7 symbols on the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 that have been stopped stop at the lower row on the left row and the lower row on the right row, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 7th symbol of the eighth reel 711b in the lower middle row, the lower row of the right light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721g are arranged in a line to form 7 symbols, and the player is informed of the hit.

  After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed. By doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the seven reach effect with one reach line can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed at the third and subsequent rotations, it is shown in FIG. 68 (H). As described above, whether each of the seven symbols in the left row and the right row of the light guide plate 72, which had been moving downward at a constant speed in synchronization with each other, stopped below the lower row in the left row or the lower row in the right row, respectively. As described above, it is not displayed in the symbol display area 710.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), one of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, and the side of the side where the backlight is turned on is turned on. The left reel 711a or the right reel 711c rotates in the forward direction. Then, when the backlight of the left reel 711a of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the 7th symbol of No. 7 is in the lower left stage and the 7th symbol of 9th is in the upper left stage. When the left reel 711a is stopped so as to be positioned at, and the backlight of the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, the 7th symbol of No. 7 is in the lower left stage, and the 7th symbol of 9th is in the upper left stage. The right reel 711c stops so as to be located at.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the seven symbols in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72 sequentially move at a constant speed to the middle stage of the left column, the middle stage of the middle column, and the middle stage of the right column, and after reaching the middle stage of the right column. To return to the middle row of the left row again and repeat the same operation, 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721b of the middle row of the left row, 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721d of the middle row of the middle row, and light emitting area 721f of the middle row of the right row of light guide plate 72 are repeated. 7 symbols are lit and displayed sequentially and cyclically for a short period of time.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the third rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (K), the guide that has been circularly moved to the right until then. When the back light of the left reel 711a is turned on in FIG. 68 (I), the middle 7 steps of the light plate 72 is turned on in the middle row of the left row or the middle row, and the back light of the right reel 711c is turned on in FIG. 68 (I). In this case, stop in the middle row of the right row or the middle row.

  As a result, when the middle 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in the middle of the left column, in the left column of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a number 9 is in the upper left stage, and the light guide plate 72 is in the left middle stage. 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left row, 7 symbols of the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a arranged in the lower left column are established, whereby the player is notified of the winning. Further, when the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in the middle row, the middle row, in the middle row of the symbol display area, the 10th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b are in the middle upper row, and the middle of the light guide plate 72 is in the middle row. 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721d in the middle row, 7 symbols in which the 7th symbol No. 8 of the middle reel 711b are lined up in a row in the middle lower row are established, whereby the player is notified of the hit. Furthermore, when the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in the middle of the right row, in the right column of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c number 9 is in the upper right, and the light guide plate 72 is in the right middle. Seven symbols in the light emitting area 721f in the middle row of the right row, and 7 symbols of the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c arranged in a line in the lower left row are established, whereby the player is notified of the hit.

  After that, the above-mentioned re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the interest of the player can be increased and the interest in the seven reach effect with one reach line can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 68 (L), the middle 7 patterns of the light guide plate that had been moving from left to right until then are 7 symbols aligned. It stops in the mode that does not become. As a result, the 7 symbols are not arranged in the symbol display area 710, and the player is informed of the loss.

  In this case, after this, a relief variation may be performed in which the seven symbols in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72 are moved to the right again at high speed, and then the final stop is performed in the manner of the seven symbols as described above with reference to FIG. 68 (K). You may do it. By preparing such a relief variation, it is possible to make the player expect that there may be a relief variation even after the seven patterns of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in a lost stop form, and the reach line is It is possible to enhance the interest in one Seven Reach production.

  Next, a description will be given of the Seven Reach production in which the reach line develops into two super reach. In this case, the seven-reach effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when each reel 711 is temporarily stopped to reach in the same stop form as in FIG. 68 (A). It Then, after this, for example, the middle reel 711b starts to rotate at a higher speed than before, and eventually the eighth symbol 7 of the middle reel 711b is temporarily stopped in the middle upper stage as shown in FIG. 69 (A). In FIG. 69 (A), symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. The same applies to FIGS. 69B to 69L below.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the backlights of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned off, and the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c move forward at high speed. When the middle reel 711b rotates in the forward direction by 2 symbols in combination with this, the 7th symbol 8 of the middle reel 711b moves from the middle upper stage to the lower middle stage, and the 10th number of the middle reel 711b increases. 7 symbols are displayed in the upper middle section. The left reel 711a and the right reel 711c, after this, 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b at the timing of later-described FIG. 69 (D), FIG. 69 (H), FIG. 69 (L) or FIG. 69 (M), The light guide plate 72 is stopped at any one of the plurality of previously prepared symbol patterns so that the symbol combination does not result in a 7 symbol combination in combination with the 7 symbols which are lit and displayed.

  Then, after FIG. 69 (B), the light emission effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move in the downward direction to the upper left tier, the left middle tier, and the lower left tier, and are synchronized with this. Then, the seven symbols in the right column of the light guide plate 72 move downward at a constant speed to the upper right stage, the right middle stage, and the lower right stage, and after each of these seven symbols on the left and right reaches the lower left column and the lower right column. , The left column upper row and the right column upper row again, and the same operation as described above is repeated, so that the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) of the left column upper row of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e of the right column upper row ( 20), 7 patterns of the left column middle luminescent area 721b (FIG. 20) and 7 patterns of the right column middle luminescent area 721f (FIG. 20), and the left column lower luminescent area 721c (FIG. 20) 7 symbols and 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721g (FIG. 20) in the lower row of the right column are in order and respectively. Is ring to lighting display by briefly.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the first rotation, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), as shown in FIG. The respective 7 symbols on the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 that have been stopped stop at the lower row on the left row and the lower row on the right row, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 7th symbol of the eighth reel 711b in the lower middle row, the lower row of the right light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721g are arranged in a line to form 7 symbols, and the player is informed of the hit.

  In addition, after this, a part or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 patterns of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of some or all of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. Also, it is possible to perform a re-lottery effect that can be expected to be promoted to win on multiple advantageous lines. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further enhanced, and the interest in the seven reach effect with two reach lines can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the case where the final effect result by the effect is lost, or when the final effect result by the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second and subsequent rotations, FIG. 7), each of the 7 symbols in the left and right rows of the light guide plate 72 that has been moving in synchronization downwardly is temporarily stopped in the middle row in the left row and the middle row in the right row, respectively.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), as in FIG. 69 (C), the 7 patterns in the left column of the light guide plate 72 and the 7 patterns in the right column in the same row are synchronized with each other in the upper row, 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721a in the upper row of the left column and 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721e in the upper row of the right column, and the light emission of the middle row in the left column, so that the operation of sequentially moving to the middle row and the lower row at a constant speed is repeated. 7 symbols of the region 721b and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right column, and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721c of the lower column of the left column and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721g of the lower column of the right column are sequentially and cyclically short time respectively. Are displayed one by one.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second rotation, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), it moves downward at a constant speed until then, as shown in FIG. The respective 7 symbols on the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 that have been stopped stop at the lower row on the left row and the lower row on the right row, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 7th symbol of the eighth reel 711b in the lower middle row, the lower row of the right light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721g are arranged in a line to form 7 symbols, and the player is informed of the hit.

  After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the seven reach effect with two reach lines can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed at the third and subsequent rotations, the result is shown in FIG. 69 (H). As described above, each of the seven symbols on the left and right rows of the light guide plate 72, which has been moving downward at a constant speed in synchronization with each other, stops at the middle row on the left row and the middle row on the right row, respectively. Then, thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 69 (I) to 68 (L), the same operations as those described above with reference to FIGS. 68 (I) to 68 (L) are performed.

<Vision opportunity production>
Next, a vision chance effect, which is another effect that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 5A, will be described.

  In FIG. 70, when the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect determination unit 225 corresponds to an effect called "vision opportunity" (hereinafter referred to as "vision opportunity effect") (or, the variation effect pattern). It is a figure for explaining the display mode when the execution of the effect corresponding to the vision chance effect is determined based on. The “vision opportunity” is a super reach that develops from the variable display state of the decorative symbol on the reel 711.

  Specifically, the vision chance effect is that, after the variable display of the decorative symbol by the reel 711 is started, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the 4th reel 73 rotates and “CHANCE” of the pattern number 5 described above with reference to FIG. 22. It is started when it is stopped by the design. Then, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), all the backlights of the reels 711 (the left reel 711a, the middle reel 711b, and the right reel 711c) of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned off.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move in the downward direction to the upper left stage, the middle left stage, and the lower left stage, and in synchronization with this, the light guide plate. Seven symbols in the right column of 72 move at a constant speed in the downward direction to the upper right stage, the right middle stage, and the lower right stage. After each of these seven symbols on the left and right reaches the left column lower stage and the right column lower stage, the left column again To return to the upper row or the upper row of the right row and repeat the same operation as described above, the 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) of the upper row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e (FIG. 20) of the upper row of the right row 7 symbols, 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b (FIG. 20) in the left column and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f (FIG. 20) in the right column, and 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721c (FIG. 20) in the lower column of the left column Seven patterns of the light emitting area 721g (FIG. 20) in the lower row of the right column are sequentially and cyclically short. Each is lighted display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), each of the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 is stopped in the upper column in the left column and the upper column in the right column, respectively, and thereafter, in FIG. 70 (E). As shown, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721c in the lower row of the left column and the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721g in the lower row of the right column are lighted and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and thereafter, these 7 symbols are displayed at a constant speed in the middle column of the middle row. , Sequentially moving to the middle row of the right row, returning to the middle row of the left row after reaching the middle row of the right row, and repeating the same operation as described above, 7 patterns of the light emitting area 721d of the middle row of the middle row of the light guide plate 72, Also, the seven symbols of the light emitting area 721f in the middle row of the right column are sequentially lit and displayed for a short time. Further, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721b in the middle row of the left column, the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the seven patterns of the light emitting area 721f in the middle row of the right column are sequentially and cyclically lit for a short time. To be done.

  Then, when the final result of the effect is a hit in one line, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the middle 7 patterns of the light guide plate 72 that has repeatedly moved to the right until then are right. Stop in the middle row.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the 7th symbol 7 of the left reel 711a is located in the middle left stage, the 7th symbol 8 of the middle reel 711b is located in the middle middle stage, and the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c is While each reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, and right reel 711c) is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 is located in the right middle row, all the backlights of the reels 711 of the drum type performance display device 71 are turned on. To do. Further, all 7 symbols which are displayed on the light guide plate 72 are turned off. As a result, in the middle of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol 7 of the left reel 711a, the 7th symbol 8th of the middle reel 711b, and the 7th symbol 7th of the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 are arranged in a row. The 7 symbol assortment arranged in line is established, and the player is informed of the hit.

  In addition, after this, a part or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 patterns of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of some or all of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. Also, it is possible to perform a re-lottery effect that can be expected to be promoted to win on multiple advantageous lines. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further enhanced, and the interest in the vision chance effect can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a hit with a plurality of lines (here, two lines), from the state described above with reference to FIG. 70 (F) to the right until then as shown in FIG. 70 (I). The seven patterns in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72, which have repeatedly moved in the direction, stop in the middle and middle stages.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), the left reel 711a is stopped so that the 7th symbol of 7th is located in the lower left tier and the 7th symbol of 9th is in the upper left tier, and the 7th symbol of 8th is middle. The middle reel 711b is stopped so as to be located in the middle stage, the right reel 711c is stopped so that the 7th symbol of 7 is located in the lower right stage, and the 7th symbol of 9 is located in the upper right stage, and at the same time, in the drum-type performance display device 71. All the backlights of each reel 711 are turned on. Further, all 7 symbols which are displayed on the light guide plate 72 are turned off. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the seventh symbol 9 of the left reel 711a in the upper left stage, the seventh symbol 8 of the middle reel 711b in the middle middle stage, and the seventh symbol 7 of the right reel 711c in the lower right stage are right. Lined up in a line on the descending line, the 7th symbol 7 of the left reel 711a in the lower left stage, the 7th symbol 8 of the middle reel 711b in the middle and middle stages, and the 7th symbol 9th of the right reel 711c in the upper right stage 7 lines of 2 lines lined up in a line on the line rising to the right are established, whereby the player is notified of the winning.

  It should be noted that after this, the re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the reach line can be enhanced for the two vision chance effects.

  On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 70 (K), it has repeatedly moved to the right at a constant speed from the state described above with reference to FIG. 70 (F). The 7 symbols on the light guide plate 72 are not displayed in the symbol display area 710 as if they stopped on the 4th reel 73.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (L), the 7th symbol 7 of the left reel 711a is located in the middle left stage, the 7th symbol 8 of the middle reel 711b is located in the middle upper stage, and the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c is While each reel 711 is stopped so that the 7th pattern of No. 7 is located in the right middle stage, all the backlights of each reel 711 in the drum type effect display device 71 are turned on, thereby notifying the player of the loss.

  In this case, after this, a relief change such as moving the seven symbols in the middle stage of the light guide plate 72 to the right again at a high speed may be performed, and thereafter, in the seven symbol arrangement mode shown in FIG. 70 (H). You may make it stop finally. By preparing such a relief variation, it is possible to make the player expect that there may be a relief variation even after each reel 711 is stopped in the stop form shown in FIG. It is possible to heighten the interest in the production of vision opportunities.

  According to the above-described vision chance rendering, the stop type by the light guide plate 72 described above with reference to FIGS. 70 (G) and 70 (K), and the final type described above with reference to FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (L). Since the stop type of the display symbol by the drum type effect display device 71 is different, the player can be made to have an unexpectedness and the interest for the vision chance effect can be further enhanced.

<Other effects using the light guide plate>
In the roulette reach effect, the seven reach effect, and the vision chance effect, the reach line is always visible to the player. The 7 patterns of the light guide plate 72, which has not been displayed, can be displayed for the first time, so that the player can recognize the reach line.

  For example, the light guide plate is triggered by the player pressing the effect button 3j after each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 is stopped in a stop type (“missing eye”) that does not mean a hit. Each of the light emitting areas 721a to 721g of 72 is lit and displayed for a short time so that the seven symbols rotate randomly or like a roulette wheel. Then, after this, among the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72, a combination of the seven symbols of the left reel 711a, the middle reel 711b, and / or the right reel 711c existing in the symbol display area 710 forms a position where a seven symbol alignment is established. The flashing of each of the light emitting areas 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 is stopped so that only one or a plurality of 7 symbols are sequentially turned on.

  By providing such an effect, it becomes possible to recognize the reach line for the first time by pressing the effect button 3j. Therefore, even when each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 is stopped by a loose eye, such an effect is produced. The player can be expected to start, and the player's interest in the game can be increased accordingly.

  As a measure against the player who does not intentionally press the effect button 3j, in the case of a hit, immediately before each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 is stopped, a hit line (a line in which the hit symbols are arranged in a line) is formed. You may make it display by 7 patterns of the light-guide plate 72.

<Effect of production using light guide plate>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 72 as the sub-decorative pattern display device is provided in addition to the drum type effect display device 71, it can be expressed only by the drum type effect display device 71. It is possible to express various diverse effects. Therefore, according to the present pachinko machine 1, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect, and thus improve the player's interest in the game.

<Expectation suggestion of the fluctuation>
As described above with reference to FIG. 23, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment including the game board 5A, the expectation degree display LED 76, the claw accessory 77, and the small movable auditors 78 (78a, 78b) are used. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a change (the change) (an effect that suggests the change expectation).

  Such a variation expectation suggesting effect is controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly the effect control CPU 201) of the peripheral control unit 5c. The production control board 200 executes the production according to the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol when the variation production determining means 225 decides to execute the variation expectation suggesting production.

  In the following, the nail rotation step-up advance notice effect, which is one of the variation expectation suggesting effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 including such a game board 5A, will be described.

  The nail rotation step-up notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that either the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect will be expressed in the variation depending on which of the steps of the plurality of stages is developed. In the step, the following effects are performed.

  First, in the first step, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the entire nail accessory 77 vibrates at the start of the fluctuation. In the second step, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the nail accessory 77 starts to rotate around the expectation display LED 76 at a high speed, and the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is higher than the expectation display LED 76. (For example, blue).

  Further, in the third step, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), after the rotation speed of the nail accessory 77 decreases, the small movable accessory 78 (78a, 78b) operates so as to poke the expectation degree display LED 76. Then, if successful, the nail accessory 77 returns to the high-speed rotation, and the rotation is continued. Then, the effect by the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 is repeated several times.

  In the third step, each time the small movable accessory 78 successfully pokes the expectation level display LED 76, the emission color of the expectation level display LED 76 sequentially changes to the emission color with a higher expectation level (for example, yellow, green, or red). Finally, based on the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76, the expectation degree of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect in the variation is suggested.

  Here, FIG. 72 (A) shows the flow of the display form of the decorative pattern variably displayed on the effect display device (here, the drum type effect display device 71), and FIG. 72 (B) shows the nail as described above. It shows the timing when the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 operate or the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes in the rotation step-up notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, first, each reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, right reel 711c) of the drum type effect display device 71 starts to rotate in the forward direction, and a predetermined rotation speed ( The rotation speed is accelerated to a high rotation speed (period T1). After that, the reels 711 that have reached the rotation speed continue to rotate at a high speed for a certain period while maintaining the rotation speed (period T2).

  Next, the rotation states of the reels 711 are adjusted so as to correct the positional relationship of the symbols respectively displayed on the reels 711 while the reels 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 rotate at high speed (period T3. ) After that, the left reel 711a is stopped and the left symbol is stopped and displayed (period T4), and the right reel 711c is stopped and the right symbol is stopped and displayed (period T5).

  Then, when the left and right symbols that are stopped and displayed are the same type of symbols, after the standby for a certain period (period T6), the normal reach effect is started, and then the middle reel 711b is stopped and the central symbol is stopped. It is displayed (period T7).

  And when normal reach does not align the same type of symbols on the same line (when the stop pattern of the decorative symbols is a display mode with a loss), if the reach develops into a super reach, a drum-type effect The middle reel 711b of the display device 71 restarts to rotate (period T8), and thereafter, an effect is displayed according to the final effect result (hit / miss) (time period T9).

  At this time, if it is decided to execute the nail rotation step-up notice effect as the variation expectation suggesting effect in the variation, as shown in FIG. 72B, the nail is changed at the timing when the variation is started. When the first step of the rotation step-up notice effect is executed and the entire nail accessory 77 vibrates, and when the second step in which the nail accessory rotates is developed, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 is more expected. Changes to a high emission color (for example, changes from white to blue) (S1).

  After that, in the middle of the period T3, the small movable accessory 78 of the nail rotation step-up notice effect vibrates, and the third step, which is the execution of the thrust operation, is executed, and the nail accessory 77 of the expectation display LED 76 is displayed. While rotating around at high speed, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to a higher emission color (for example, changes from blue to yellow) (S2).

  Furthermore, the third step of the nail rotation step-up advance notice effect is executed at the timing when the normal reach effect is started (timing at the start of the period T7) in the effect display device, and the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are used. While the above-described effect is performed, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to a higher emission degree (for example, changes from yellow to green) (S3A).

  After that, the third step of the nail rotation step-up notice production is executed again at the timing when the reach develops into the super reach (timing at the start of the period 8) on the effect display device, and the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are executed. The above-mentioned effect using is performed, and at the same time, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to the emission color with a higher expectation degree (for example, changes from green to red) (S3B).

  It should be noted that the time chart shown in FIG. 72 is an example, and each reel 711 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) before the reach is developed (for example, before the period T7, the period T8, or the period T9), and then re-changed. When performing the pseudo continuous (pseudo-variation) effect, the timings of the period T1 to the period T6 are repeated a plurality of times. Therefore, the timing (S1, S2) for changing the color of the expectation indicator LED 76 should be increased. You can

  Further, the timings S1 to S3B for changing the color of the expectation indicator LED 76 may be configured to include a gasse pattern in which the color is not necessarily changed. In that case, the operation of the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78. The pattern is preferably configured to be different from the success pattern (pattern in which the color changes). In addition, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is three times or more (an example of a condition in which the development to super reach is definite), or when the development to super reach is definite, the expectation indicator LED 76 is displayed at a timing such as S3B. When it is time to show the change, the player is paying attention to the high-achieving reach production that will occur from now on. It is also conceivable to configure so as not to damage.

  Note that the nail rotation step-up notice effect has been illustrated as a notice for changing the color of the expectation degree display LED 76, but it may be performed in other ways, and the notice degree of the expectation degree display LED 76 may be changed for each pseudo variation. It may be configured to give the player an expectation about the change.

<Expectation suggestion for prefetch target hold>
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, using the expectation display LED 76, the nail accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78, an effect that suggests the expectation of the pre-read hold change (prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect) ) Can also be executed.

  The look-ahead target hold expectation suggestive effect using the expectation display LED 76, the nail accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78 is also controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly the effect control CPU 201). In practice, the effect control board 200 determines that the prefetch target hold expectation degree suggesting effect is to be executed for the hold change (when the preread ID of FIG. 31 determined for the hold change is other than “0”), The emission color and emission mode of the expectation degree display LED 76 are changed at a timing before the variable display of the suspension change (prefetch target suspension) is performed, and the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are interlocked with this. By doing so, the expectation degree of the pending change (prefetch target pending) is suggested in advance.

  FIG. 73 shows a variation effect pattern of each pending change that is determined to execute the prefetch target pending expectation suggesting effect for the latest pending change among the prefetch target pending expectation suggesting effects and that precedes the pending change. If the condition that all of them are determined as the variation production pattern of the loss (so-called “dope”) without the reach production or the agitation production is satisfied (the prefetch ID of FIG. 31 determined for the pending variation is other than “0”) And the case where the prefetch ID of each pending change preceding the pending fluctuation is determined to be "0"), the flow of the prefetch target pending expectation suggesting effect is shown. In the following, such a condition will be referred to as an effect pattern determination condition.

  That is, FIG. 73 shows a flow of the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect when only the latest hold change is the target of the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect. In the following, the hold variation that is the target of the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting production in such a situation (the last prefetched change at that stage) will be referred to as the production target suspension variation.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), first of the first hold display LEDs 751 of the hold display LEDs 75, first hold display LEDs 751 associated with the effect target hold change (for example, FIG. 23 (A) or The leftmost first hold display LED 751a in (B) starts blinking.

  In addition, the 1st hold | maintenance display LED751 matched with such an effect | action target hold | maintenance change is a hold | maintenance change before an effect | action target hold | maintenance change within the range of the maximum hold number (4 pieces in this example) of a 1st special symbol after that. Every time the effect corresponding to is digested and a new pending change is reserved, the display sequentially moves to the first pending display LED 751 on the right side, and in conjunction with this, the expected degree of the effect target pending fluctuation is suggested. The blinking of the first hold display LED 751a is also sequentially moved to the right.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), each time the variable display of the decorative pattern for each pending change that is held before the effect target pending change is performed, the nail combination is performed at the start of the relevant variable display. The whole thing 77 vibrates for a fixed time. At this time, when changing the display mode of the expectation display LED 76 as the prefetching effect before the start of the change with respect to the prefetching target hold, each elapsed time for which the preset contents of the prefetching target holding expectation suggesting effect should be changed. Each time (hereinafter, referred to as “holding change point”), the left and right small movable accessory objects 78 hit the expectation degree display LED 76, and at the same time, the nail accessory article 77 rotates at high speed around the expectation degree display LED 76. Take action. Along with this, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to the emission color of higher expectation. For example, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 is sequentially changed from white to blue, yellow, green, or red each time the variation display of the decorative design for each pending variation that is suspended before the effect target pending variation is executed. It changes by skipping some colors. On the other hand, when the preceding hold is exhausted before the start of the change for the prefetch target hold, the change without changing the expectation degree display LED 76 ends with only the vibration of the nail accessory 77 for a certain period of time.

  Then, when it comes to the order of the effect target pending changes, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern for the effect target pending changes, the entire nail accessory 77 vibrates for a certain period of time, The expectation degree display LED 76 is displayed by taking over the aspect that has changed at the time of the immediately preceding change. Further, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), each time the 76 hold change points of the degree-of-expectation display LED based on the notice effect such as the above-mentioned notice of stepping up the nail rotation is passed, the left and right small movable accessory objects are passed. When 78 hits the expectation degree display LED 76 or the like, at the same time, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to the emission color having a higher expectation degree.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 74, it is determined that the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect is executed for the latest hold change, and the change effect pattern of each hold change preceding the hold change does not satisfy the above effect pattern determination condition. When the fluctuation effect pattern determined for at least one of the pending fluctuations preceding the pending fluctuation is a fluctuating effect pattern involving a reach effect or a stir effect (prefetching of FIG. 31 determined for the pending fluctuation) If the ID is other than "0" and the look-ahead ID of at least one of the pending changes preceding each of the pending changes is determined to be other than "0", the prefetch target pending expectation suggesting effect Shows the flow of.

  In this case, the effect pattern of the look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggesting effect (hereinafter referred to as "effect pattern A") and the effect pattern of the look-ahead object hold expectation degree suggesting effect described above with reference to FIG. The difference from "Pattern B") is that while the blinking display of the hold display LED 75 is performed, when performing the variable display of the decorative pattern for each hold change that is held before the effect target hold change, This is because only the vibrating operation of the nail accessory 77 is performed, the rotating operation of the nail accessory 77 and the left and right small movable accessory 78 are not operated, and the expectation degree display LED 76 is not changed in advance.

  This is to prevent misidentification by the player. That is, when the variation production pattern determined for at least one of the suspension variations held before the production target suspension variation is the variation production pattern involving the reach production, the pending variation is the variation. 71, there is a possibility that the nail rotation step-up advance notice effect described above with reference to FIG. 71 may be performed, or the expected degree suggested when the emission color of the expected degree display LED 76 is changed in advance, This is because there is a risk of being mistakenly recognized as being performed for a change related to the hold before the read-ahead target hold.

  In addition, the operation of the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 in the nail rotation step-up notice effect, and the nail accessory 77 and the small movable accessory described above with reference to FIG. As described above, the operation of 78 is similar in that the nail accessory 77 rotates around the expectation display LED 76 at a high speed, and the small movable accessory 78 performs the operation of thrusting the expectation display LED 76. As in A, when the reach variation is performed before the hold that is the prefetch target, the effect that is being performed at that time is either the nail rotation step-up notice effect or the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effect. The player may not be able to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such misidentification of the player, the pre-read hold change is a case where the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, and 74 of the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effects when the fluctuation effect pattern determined for at least one of the pending fluctuations that has been previously held is the fluctuation effect pattern involving the reach effect. At the stage of (B), it is common with the variation expectation suggestion effect such as causing the nail accessory 77 to rotate around the expectation indicator LED 76 at a high speed, or causing the small movable accessory 78 to poke the expectation indicator LED 76. With the effect pattern A having a small amount of similar effect content, the expectation degree of the pending change is indicated by the expectation degree display unit including the expectation degree LED 76, the nail accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78. And so as to suggest.

  In the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effect of FIG. 74, as shown in FIG. 74A, first, as in FIG. 73A, the effect target of the first hold display LEDs 751 of the hold display LEDs 75 is first set. The first hold display LED 751 associated with the hold change starts blinking.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), each time a variation display of a decorative design for each pending variation that is suspended before the effect target pending variation is executed, the nail combination is performed at the start of the variation display. The whole thing 77 vibrates for a fixed time. At this time, for example, in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect of the effect pattern B described above with reference to FIG. 73 (B), the left and right small movable accessory objects 78 hit the expectation degree display LEDs 76 for each hold change point, and at the same time, the nails. Although the accessory 77 was rotating around the expectation display LED 76 at a high speed, in the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effect of the effect pattern A, the operation of such a small movable accessory 78 and the claw accessory 77 is performed. Not performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), as in FIG. 73 (C) of the effect pattern B, at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern with respect to the effect target suspension change, the entire nail accessory 77 is kept for a certain time. Since the display mode of the expectation degree display LED 76 is not changed before the fluctuation to be read ahead is started, the expectation degree display LED 76 starts blinking in a color with the lowest expectation degree. Further, after this, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), as in the case of FIG. 73 (D) of the effect pattern B, the left and right small movable accessory objects 78 display the expectation degree display LEDs 76 each time the hold change point elapses. At the same time, the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes to the emission color with a higher expectation degree.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold change is determined to execute the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effect, and the hold change satisfies the above-described effect pattern determination condition, the change is held. In order to suggest the degree of expectation of the hold variation in the effect pattern B having little or no effect content that is common or similar to the expectation suggestion effect, the effect that is being performed at that time is the nail rotation step-up notice effect and the pre-reading target hold expectation degree suggestion. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot determine which of the effects is the production. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect and the variation expectation suggestion effect, and thus to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  However, even when the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect is performed by the effect pattern B, in the fluctuation until the fluctuation start of the prefetch target hold, the operation involving the vibration of the nail accessory 77 is executed at the start of fluctuation, There is a risk of mistakenly recognizing that the claw rotation step-up notice has started. In order to solve this problem, it is preferable to limit the execution of the nail rotation step-up notice during a change in execution of the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect of the effect pattern B. As a mode of limiting, a method of not executing at all, or a method of not executing at the first pseudo fluctuation (until the first temporary stop is performed) that can be recognized as the start of fluctuation can be considered.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to make it easier to distinguish between the variation expectation suggestion effect and the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect, in the effect pattern A of the prefetch target hold expectation suggestion effect, the rotation operation of the nail accessory 77 and Although the case where the effect using the small movable accessory 78 is not performed has been described, it is easy to distinguish the variation expectation suggestive effect and the prefetch target hold expectation suggesting effect with other effect contents. You may

  In addition, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to display the expectation level regarding the prefetch target hold on the hold display LED 75 that emits a single color so that the expectation level can be discriminated step by step, and it is possible to perform a dramatic effect. Although the light emitting unit (such as the LED provided near the movable accessory) that can be recognized by the player is the expectation display LED 76, the above-described effect is illustrated, but the LEDs other than the expectation display LED 76 are illustrated. (For example, when the effect is performed for the lottery of the first special symbol, the color is changed for the LED provided on the first starting opening 61), and the expectation degree display LED 76 is for the changing special symbol. It may be possible to display only the degree of expectation. In this case, the change in the display mode as the prefetching effect becomes less relevant to the effect, so sound effects etc. are used to make full use of the prefetching target object. It is also possible to make show the LED changes rendition of displaying a degree of expectation.

  Further, in the above example, in the case of the effect pattern B, the specification is such that each time the fluctuation is started, the timing of changing the display mode of the expectation degree display LED 76 is provided, but the timing is not limited to this timing. The expectation level display LED 76 may be changeable at the time of holding occurrence (starting mouth winning). In addition, since there may be a case where the variation time does not remain at the time of the hold occurrence, the operation of the claw accessory 77 or the small movable accessory 78 at the time of the hold occurrence is different from the operation at the start of the variation. Alternatively, the nail accessory 77 may be rotated in a shortened manner. In this case, depending on the mode of the change being executed at the timing when the hold is generated (for example, the state in which the color change of the expectation degree display LED 76 has been executed, the change that may develop into a reach change is being executed, etc.) Even if the change at the time of occurrence is elected, it is conceivable that the specification will be forced to cancel.

<Player operation input production>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect button 3j and the second effect button 3k (see FIG. 1) are effect input devices that input the input information to the effect control board 200 based on the input operation by the player. Yes, they are also collectively referred to as “effect buttons”.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 is based on the fact that the effective input operation to the effect button is performed at the time of executing the effect interlocked with the variable display of the decorative pattern and the notice effect thereof. It is possible to execute the "player operation input effect" that can change the effect mode being executed.

  Here, the period during which the input operation to the effect button is valid (operation valid period) is determined based on the execution time of the effect being executed, the effect pattern of the player operation input effect, and the like, and prompts the operation by the player. Therefore, it is preferable that the operation valid period is notified so that the player can recognize it.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the player operation input effect controlled by the effect control board 200, for example, the segment effect display device 74 (see FIG. 19) provided on the game board 5A is used. Thus, the player is notified of the operation valid period. As described above with reference to FIG. 19 and the like, the segment effect display device 74 used in this example is controlled by the effect control board (effect control CPU 201) and is configured by three segment display devices (segments 741a to 741c). .

  Note that the player operation input effect of the present embodiment can be provided with a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes (operation types) of the required input operation. Furthermore, it is possible to notify the operation valid period in different effect modes according to effect patterns having different operation modes of the input operation.

  As a specific operation mode (operation type) of the input operation, for example, “single press” that requires one pressing operation for the effect button 3j, and continuous pressing operation for the effect button 3j are requested. "Strike", "long press" that requires an operation to keep pressing the effect button 3j for a certain period of time or longer, "pull" that requires a pulling operation for the second effect button 3k having a lever structure, etc. Can be considered.

  In addition, as another operation mode, when the production button 3j is continuously pressed by the customization function that can be set by the player or as the specifications of the gaming machine, when the production button 3j is continuously pressed (that is, " When the input processing similar to the “continuous hit” operation mode) is performed, the operation mode in which the effect button 3j is continuously pressed for a certain period of time or more is referred to as “automatic continuous hit”.

  Further, by a customization function that can be set by the player, or as a specification of the gaming machine, even if the player does not operate the effect button, a suitable operation mode (“single press”, “continuous hit”, “long press”, When the input processing is performed by assuming that the input operation by “pulling” is performed, the operation mode is “automatic operation” regardless of whether or not the production button is operated. Called.

  Note that the "automatic operation" is always to perform a required operation (for example, if the success effect is selected in the continuous hit effect, "a deemed operation" is performed to the extent that the success effect is always produced). Alternatively, whether or not to perform the “considered operation” may be determined by the effect lottery, the “considered operation” may not be randomly executed, and the effect may be executed in a non-operation mode. In this way, for example, even when the "repeated hit" effect is being executed, while the reaction (post-operation effect) based on the "considered operation" is executed several times, the effect success by the "automatic operation" is achieved. It is possible to realize an effect mode in which the ratio is configured not to be 100%.

  Hereinafter, the player operation input effect including the notification of the operation valid period that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described in detail for each operation mode of the above input operation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect linked to the variable display of the decorative symbol and the notice effect thereof (hereinafter referred to as “main effect” to prevent confusion with the player operation input effect) are being executed. The player operation input effect is executed, and the effect mode of the main effect can be changed when an effective input operation is performed in the player operation input effect. However, in the case of the automatic operation described later, even if the input operation is not performed during the operation valid period in the player operation input effect, internal processing is performed to consider that the input operation is performed (deemed operation), so that the main effect is achieved. The presentation mode of can be changed. Therefore, when the predetermined input condition regarding the input operation is satisfied in the player operation input effect, it can be expressed that the effect mode of the main effect is changed. Further, as a specification of the gaming machine, it is widely known that even if an input operation is not performed during the operation valid period, the presentation mode is changed as in the case where a predetermined input operation is performed after the operation valid period has elapsed. However, the present embodiment does not exclude such specifications.

<Player operation input production (single press)>
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single press. FIG. 75 is a single shot of a normal pattern that is executed when the main effect (or player operation input effect to be executed) that is being executed is a reach effect or the like (an effect of a normal pattern) with a relatively low degree of expectation. It is a description of the player operation input effect of pressing. In addition, when the player operation input effect is executed in a normal pattern, the degree of expectation by the player operation input effect to be executed (the degree of expectation that a success result can be obtained by the input operation, a big hit in the variation display) The case where the degree of expectation is not higher than the chance pattern described later is also included.

  In FIG. 75, the “production mode” that summarizes the effect contents output to the player side and the “operation acceptance control” that summarizes the internal control status regarding acceptance / non-acceptance of the input operation to the effect button are in time series. Also shown together.

  Of these, on the side of the “production mode”, in addition to the “name” of each production, as specific production contents, “segment display” by the segment production display device 74 and “sound output by the speaker 11 (speaker 3i). Is shown. Further, on the side of the "operation acceptance control", an internal "control state" regarding the validity / invalidity of the input operation with respect to the effect button (effect button 3j or the second effect button 3k) targeted in the player operation input effect is provided. (In other words, whether the input information based on the input operation is input to the effect control board 200, or whether the effect control board 200 processes the input information as valid).

  Here, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment is configured by a transition of a plurality of different effect modes, and specifically, an "introduction effect" that prompts an input operation to the effect button and an input to the effect button. "Effective time display effect" for notifying that the operation is validly accepted and urging execution of the input operation, and "post-operation effect" for notifying the result of execution of the input operation on the effect button are included. . Therefore, the production period of the player operation input production is the "introduction production period" in which the "introduction production" is derived, the "input effective notification period" in which the "effective time display production" is derived, and the "post-production production". Is derived, and the "post-operation performance period" is derived.

  Of these, in the post-operation production derived in the post-operation production period, when the input operation to the production button in the input valid notification period satisfies a predetermined input condition, the main production is given to the player in the target game. "Profit" or "Expectation level of profit" can be reported. The "profit" here specifically corresponds to, for example, a big hit game, the number of rounds at the time of big hit, a type of big hit (normal / probable variation), and the like. Further, the “expectation degree to which a profit is given” corresponds to the expectation degree to the big hit, the expectation degree to the development of the high expectation effect, and the like.

  The above-described illustration contents are common to all the drawings for explaining the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, and repeated explanation is omitted in other drawings (for example, FIG. 78, FIG. 79, etc.) described later. To do.

  In the following description, it is assumed that the segments 741a to 741c configuring the segment effect display device 74 are segment displays whose emission colors and luminances during emission can be changed. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration of such a multifunctional segment display device, and the segment effect display device 74 appropriately performs segment display within the range of the function of each segment display device. You can

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of segment display. FIG. 76 (A) shows a segment display example of numbers (0 to 9) and symbols (upper / middle / lower) by one 7-segment display. Further, FIG. 76 (B) shows a segment display example of a character string used in the description of the present embodiment. In the case of the segment effect display device 74 of this example, since there are only two 7-segment displays, the segments 741b and 741c, it is not possible to display a character string of three or more characters illustrated in FIG. Can not. A method of displaying such a character string will be described later.

  The specific features of FIG. 75 will be described. According to FIG. 75, first, the introduction effect is started in the introduction effect period, and it is suggested / informed that the input operation of the single push is required for the effect button 3j. As a concrete presentation mode, for example, the segment effect display device 74 uses the segments 741b and 741c to display the character string “PUSH” in white in the segment. In this example, the white segment display of the introduction effect indicates that it is the player operation input effect of the “single press” operation.

  Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the segment display in the operation input effect. FIG. 77A shows an example of the display transition of the segment display of the character string "PUSH" in the introduction effect of FIG. 77B and the like will be described later. Note that, in FIG. 77A, when the character string "PUSH" is displayed, "-" is displayed before and after "PUSH". This is a delimiter display for improving the readability when the display content of three characters or more (PUSH) in two segments 714a and 741b is displayed in a loop in a stepwise manner. Other examples described later (for example, "good"). , Etc.) may be displayed in the same manner.

  The segment display in FIG. 75 is an example. Alternatively, for example, a character string of "Pb" may be displayed using the two segments 714a and 741b as a display meaning "Push Button" (see also FIG. 76B). In this case, since two characters are displayed on the segment display for two digits, "Pb" can be continuously displayed, and there is no need to perform stepwise sequential display as in the case of the character string "PUSH". The person can glance at the instruction content.

  Further, for example, in the segment display of the introduction effect, the display of the character string such as "PUSH" or "Pb" may be blinked for a predetermined number of times. Further, at this time, it is possible to indicate to the player that the operation start timing is close by increasing the brightness or changing the color as the number of times of lighting progresses.

  Further, in the introduction effect, the speaker 11 “presses” at a predetermined timing (preferably immediately before the transition) before transitioning to the input valid notification period after outputting a predetermined sound effect (jingle) in accordance with the segment display. Is output. With such an introduction effect, the player can more clearly recognize that pressing of the effect button 3j is required.

  In the sound output of the introduction effect, the sound effect may not be output depending on the pattern of the main effect being executed or the player operation input effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player operation input effect that requires a press operation of the effect button 3j for the prefetch effect, the effect suddenly occurs by outputting "press" without a sound effect in the first half. It can be expected to make the players feel more interesting and entertaining.

  Further, in the sound output of the introduction effect, a sound effect or an instruction sound may be output using a specific dedicated sound source according to the pattern of the main effect being executed or the player operation input effect. Specifically, for example, when a high-expectation effect is executed, the "press" voice may be output in an emphasis mode in which the volume, length, voice color, etc. are different from the normal "press" voice. Good. Furthermore, the emphasized voice may be played so as to continue until the input valid notification period. By giving a voice instruction in such an emphasizing mode, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the effect has a higher expectation than usual, and it is possible to raise the player's interest.

  Regarding the operation acceptance control, the control state of the operation acceptance control is "ineffective period" during most of the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed, and the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalid. However, at least until the effective time display effect is started by shifting to the input effective notification period, the input operation of the effect button 3j is switched to the “effective period”.

  However, how much before the input valid notification period is switched to the valid period can be appropriately changed in consideration of the appearance of the effect and the like. For example, in the case of FIG. 75, since the segment display of “PUSH” and the sound output of “push” are performed in the introduction effect, the player may immediately perform the input operation in response to these outputs. Therefore, in such a case, the control state may be switched to the valid period during the voice output of "press" in the introduction effect period, and as a result, the input operation performed immediately can be accepted. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of preventing a decrease in the interest of the player when the input operation is ignored.

  Next, when the input valid notification period is entered, the valid time display effect is started. In the effective time display effect, the segment effect display device 74 displays the segment in a mode different from that in the introduction effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (B) or FIG. 75, after displaying the character string “Pb” meaning pressing of the effect button 3j, the remaining time value of the operation valid period (for example, the number of seconds) According to, the countdown display is performed from the middle. Further, as shown in FIG. 75, as an example, “Pb” is displayed in blue, which indicates a low expectation (or normal expectation), and the countdown display indicates a countdown. Display in yellow. By performing such an effective time display effect, the player can be informed of the operation effective period in which the input operation to the effect button 3j should be performed, and the remaining time. Here, the "Pb" display and the countdown display are displayed in different colors so that the passage of time can be easily understood. However, if it is determined that the display mode itself changes and it is discriminative, the same color is emitted. Alternatively, when the countdown progresses during the countdown display period and the remaining amount becomes small (for example, after the count “3”), the emission color may be changed, and such emission control is performed. By doing so, it is possible to more visually present to the player that the remaining valid operation period is short.

  Further, in the effective time display effect, the speaker 11 may output a countdown by voice in conjunction with the segment display (see FIG. 75). However, as will be described later, in the single-shot effective time display effect, when the input operation to the effect button 3j is executed once during the operation effective period, the control is changed to the operation invalid period and the post-operation effect is started. Therefore, the sound output of the countdown by the speaker 11 is interrupted when the input operation is executed.

  The display mode of the segment display in the effective time display effect is not limited to the above example, and various display modes can be adopted. For example, as another example of the countdown display, FIG. 77C shows a segment display example showing the progress of the countdown by gradually turning off the light-emitting LEDs on the outer periphery by using three segments 714a to 714c. Has been done. In this case, when all the LEDs are finally turned off, it means that the operation valid period ends. The color may be changed instead of being turned off.

  Further, as another example of the display mode of the segment display in the effective time display effect, the character strings “PU” and “SH” may be alternately turned on or the character string “Pb” may be continuously displayed. In this case, the LED of the segment display is turned on in a color different from the color in the introduction effect as in the case of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 75, whereby the period of the “introduction effect” and the “effective time display effect”, that is, the ineffective period. It is preferable to make it easy for the player to identify the effective period.

  Further, in the segment display in the effective time display effect, when only the character string is displayed and the countdown display by the numerical or symbolic expression (for example, corresponding to the sequential light-off of the outer circumference described above) is not separately performed, the time is elapsed. By changing the display mode of the character string, the remaining operation valid period may be reduced.

  Specifically, for example, the brightness of the character string such as “Pb” is gradually decreased, and when the predetermined dark brightness is reached or the light is completely turned off, the end of the operation valid period can be indicated. Further, for example, regardless of the display content of the segment display, the blinking speed (blinking cycle) and the lighting time of the LED of the segment display are gradually changed to indicate the end of the valid operation period by the end of blinking (for example, all lights off). be able to. Further, when the LED blinks as described above, if a character string having a specific meaning such as “Pb” or “PUSH” is segment-displayed, the operation type can be more clearly notified to the player. In addition to this, the display content of the segment display and the light emission timing may be combined in another mode. Specifically, for example, a character string such as "Pb" is displayed blinking at the same brightness and the same period until a predetermined timing, and after another predetermined timing near the end of the operation valid period, "Pb" is displayed. It is also possible to indicate the end of the operation valid period by displaying a character string such as “” while gradually decreasing the brightness and finally turning off the LED.

  Further, in the segment display in the effective time display effect, the display color (light emitting color) of the segment display is gradually changed with the passage of time, regardless of the type of display content (character string, number, symbolic expression). Depending on the countdown display, the color may be changed in accordance with the countdown display. As specific color changes, for example, red, green, yellow, blue, white, and the order of extinguishing can be adopted, which is a color change that a general player imagines that the degree of expectation is lowered. Alternatively, by changing the segment display (segments 741a to 741c) displaying the segments one by one to a specific color (for example, red which is assumed to give a sense of crisis), all segments are changed. A method of indicating the end of the operation valid period may be used.

  Although various display modes of segment display in the effective time display effect have been shown, the effect control board 200 has a game state (probability change / normal / time saving, etc.), effect type (prefetch effect, special setting by back button, etc.), etc. In a specific situation based on, the segment display itself in the input valid notification period may not be derived.

  In addition, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the content suggested in the introduction effect (that is, the input operation request to the effect button) may be displayed again in the effective time display effect. Specifically, for example, the display of the character string "PUSH" is sandwiched while the countdown display is being performed in the segment display. In this way, by notifying the required input operation even during the input valid notifying period, it becomes possible to recognize that the countdown display is related to the button effect, and it is possible to take care of missing or missing the introduction effect. It is possible to provide a game machine that is kind to the player. When performing the insertion display of the input operation request in the effective time display effect as described above, during the insertion display, the effect progress in the effective time display effect as the effect display is continued while continuing the effective period of reception of the effect button. (For example, color change of segment display, progress of countdown, etc.) may be stopped or may be performed in the background. These are not limited to single-shot player operation input effects, but can be applied to all player operation input effects except automatic operations such as continuous hits and long presses, which will be described later.

  Next, the effect transition after the input operation to the effect button 3j is performed during the input effective notification period (during execution of the effective time display effect) will be described. Since this example is a single-shot player operation input effect, if the input operation is performed once during the operation valid period, the input condition regarding the input operation is satisfied, and the operation period after the operation is changed to the after-operation effect. Be started. That is, the segment display in the effective time display effect and the effect by sound output (specifically, the operation effective time is displayed and the countdown is notified) are stopped when one input operation is performed. At this time, the control state of the operation acceptance control is switched from the “valid period” to the “invalid period”, and thereafter, the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalid at least until the main player operation input effect is completed.

  In the post-operation effect, the effect control board 200 displays the result based on the input operation using the segment effect display device 74 and the speaker 11 in a mode different from that in the introduction effect and the effective time display effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of a success effect showing a successful result advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. 75, “good” is displayed in the segment display by the segment effect display device 74 (see FIG. 77 (D). In addition, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (SE). On the other hand, for example, in the case of a failure effect indicating a failure result that is not advantageous to the player, the segment display is set to “−−” (the “middle” display in FIG. 76 (A) is displayed side by side on the segments 714b and 714c). To). The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or if the success or failure of the input operation is selected by lottery, the result of the lottery is selected. Good.

  The display mode in the post-operation effect is not limited to the above example, and other character strings may be segment-displayed or sound output depending on the success effect or the failure effect. Further, for example, all the segments 714a to 714c may be illuminated so as to produce a successful effect. However, for the purpose of clarifying that the result of accepting the input operation is displayed in either the successful production or the failed production, avoid a production mode in which the segment display is turned off immediately after the start of the post-operation production. Is preferred. Further, the post-operation effect may be replaced with an effect corresponding to the success effect or the failure effect in the main effect.

  If no input operation is performed during the input valid notification period (during effective time display performance), after the input valid notification period elapses, the operation shifts to the post-operation performance period (post-operation performance), and at the same time, the operation is performed. The admission control is also switched from the valid period to the invalid period. In the present embodiment, with respect to the switching timing when the operation reception control is switched to the invalid period without performing the input operation, a predetermined delay time is secured after all the effects for the effective time display effect have been derived. You may do it. In this case, since the input operation by the player can be effectively accepted immediately after the end of the effective time display effect for notifying that it is the operation acceptance period, it is possible to remedy when the input operation by the player is delayed. The possibility increases, and you can expect the effect of giving the player a sense of security.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, most of the "introduction effect period" is described as "ineffective period" of the input operation of the effect button 3j, but the "input operation itself of the effect button 3j" is described. Instead of targeting "invalid", "target switching" that is performed based on the input operation for the effect determined and executed in the effect lottery as the button effect "is made the target of" invalidity ". Good. Further, as a modified example, the input operation for the "effect other than the button effect that is being executed as the notice effect is changing" may be treated as "effective".

  For example, when the introduction effect is executed at the timing when the button effect is executed as the notice effect, the character string of "PUSH", which is the introduction effect as the segment display, is displayed, so that the button input operation is performed in advance. There are cases. Therefore, when the button effect as the notice effect is executed, if a button input operation is performed during the introduction effect period, a mode may be adopted in which a new special effect execution lottery is performed. As an example, if the production button 3j is pressed while the character string “PUSH” of the introduction production period is displayed on the segment production display device 74, the variation being executed is a high-expectation variation that develops into SP reach. Only in a certain case or when the variation being executed is a big hit, the character string “PUSH” on the segment display device 74 is displayed in yellow or rainbow color for a moment with a predetermined probability, or a character suggesting a chance. It is conceivable to execute an effect such as temporarily changing to a line.

  However, if the special effect that is performed during the introduction period of such a button effect is executed at the timing immediately before switching to the “input valid notification period”, it is input as the button effect determined in the effect lottery. As a result of the operation, there is a risk of erroneously recognizing that a display having a high degree of expectation has been executed. Therefore, for example, a special effect is not executed at the timing when the sound effect SE “press” is emitted from the speaker 11. It is preferable to be able to switch and control a period (timing) during which a different effect can be executed.

  The above is the detailed description of the player operation input effect (normal pattern) of single press. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 may be able to execute the player operation input effect of the chance pattern, which has a higher expectation than the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. As a specific case where the player operation input effect of the chance pattern is executed, the player operation input effect is executed in the high-expectation main effect, and the game is performed regardless of the expectation of the main effect. There may be a case where the expectation that the input operation in the human operation input effect is a successful result is high.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect (chance pattern) of a single press. FIG. 78 shows an example of the effect transition in a form comparable to the example shown in FIG. 75, for the player operation input effect of single press by the chance pattern having higher expectation than the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. It is shown.

  As illustrated in FIG. 78, the player operation input effect of the chance pattern can be realized in an effect mode different from the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. For example, regarding the emission color of the segment display, the white or blue portion in the normal pattern of FIG. 75 is red in the chance pattern, which generally indicates a high degree of expectation, or the extremely high degree of expectation of successful production (of success). It may be displayed by changing to a rainbow color or the like that indicates (determined). Further, for example, regarding sound output, when a male voice is used in the normal pattern, a female voice or a mechanical voice may be used in the chance pattern. Also, the speech dialogue may be changed.

  Further, in the player operation input effect of the chance pattern, each effect period (introduction effect period, effective time display effect period, post-operation effect period) to be configured is set to be longer than that of the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. You may By setting the introduction effect period to be long, it is possible to execute the effect that is stronger than the normal pattern, so that the player's interest in the input operation can be further enhanced. Further, by setting the post-operation performance period to be longer, the result display can be performed longer than the normal pattern. Therefore, especially when the success result is notified, the flashing SE is kept flowing to satisfy the player. It can be expected to enhance the feeling.

  The illustration in FIG. 78 will be specifically described. First, in the introduction production of FIG. 78, the implementation period (introduction production period) is set to be longer than that of the introduction production of FIG. 75, and the output sound is “Be energetic ...”, “Go!”, “ It changes in multiple steps in the order of "press". Then, in accordance with the change in the output sound, in the segment display, the emission color of “PUSH” may be upgraded from white to red (indicating a high degree of expectation). In addition, when the light emission color of the segment display is red from the start of the introduction effect, the downgrade change of changing to white may not be performed. Further, the timing of the change in the emission color in the segment display and the change in the output sound in the sound output do not have to coincide. Further, the emission color may be changed in the same type of segment display such that the emission color may be upgraded from white to red while "-PUSH-" is repeatedly displayed.

  Next, in the effective time display effect of FIG. 78, a character string similar to the normal pattern of FIG. 75 is displayed in the segment display (for example, countdown display from “Pb” display), but at least a part of the emission color is displayed. It can be different from the regular pattern. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 75, the character string “Pb” is emitted in blue, but in the case of FIG. 78, the character string “Pb” is changed to blue indicating a low expectation (or normal expectation). In this way, a pattern that emits red light that indicates high expectations is prepared.

  In addition, when the segment display of "PUSH" is red at the end of the introduction effect, it is preferable that "Pb" of the effective time display effect is also displayed in red from the beginning. By doing so, a series of player operation input effects can be progressed without lowering the once-expected expectation (reliability), so that an effect of maintaining amusement of the game can be expected. However, in the case where the emission color of the segment display is maintained from the introduction effect to the effective time display effect, in order to have a difference in the effect mode between the two effects, even if the same red display is used, the brightness is changed. Alternatively, it is preferable to perform blinking display.

  Next, in the post-operation effect of FIG. 78, the implementation period (post-operation effect period) is set longer than that of the normal pattern of FIG. 75, which is the post-operation effect. In the segment display, the character string “good” is displayed in red or rainbow, which is different from the normal pattern displayed in blue. In general, red is a color that gives an image of high expectations, and rainbow color is a color that gives an image of even higher expectations. In addition, the iridescent light emission by the segment effect display device 74 is realized, for example, by emitting light in seven different colors for each segment constituting the segments 741a to 741c. In the post-operation effect shown in FIG. 78, the sound effect (SE) is also output in a mode (volume, length, dialogue, etc.) different from the sound effect of the post-operation effect in the normal pattern.

  The above is a detailed description of the player operation input effect (chance pattern) of a single press. Note that, in the present embodiment, similarly to the explanation that various variations can be adopted for the player operation input effect of the normal pattern, similarly, various variations are also adopted in the player operation input effect of the chance pattern. can do. Further, also in the player operation input effect of continuous hits and the player operation input effect of long press, which will be described in detail later, similarly to the player operation input effect of single press, there is a chance pattern effect mode in addition to the normal pattern. Also, various variations can be adopted for each effect mode, but since there are many parts to be repeatedly described, these descriptions may be omitted.

  However, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment allows various effect modes to be executed as described above, while allowing the operation type of the input operation (single press, continuous hit, long press, etc.) to be distinguished. It is preferable that the output contents of the segment display or the sound output and the like are performed in different presentation modes according to the operation type. In addition, the production (period) so that the introduction production (introduction production period), the effective time display production (input valid notification period), and the post-operation production (post-production production period) that constitute a series of player operation input productions can be distinguished. ), It is preferable that the output contents of the segment display or the sound output and the like are performed in different presentation modes.

<Player operation input production (continuous hit)>
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of player operation input effects of continuous hits. The player operation input effect of continuous hitting will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 79.

  In the example of FIG. 79, it is suggested / informed that in the introduction effect (introduction effect period), continuous input operation (intermittent multiple times input operation) is required for the effect button 3j. As a specific presentation mode, for example, the segment effect display device 74 uses the segments 741b and 741c to display the character string “PUSH” in green or red (see also FIG. 77A). In this example, the green segment display indicates that it is a player operation input effect of a “continuous hit” operation, and the red segment display indicates a high degree of expectation. In the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the light emission color of the segment display is changed to a specific color (for example, red) at each stage along with the progress of the effect in order to suggest that it is a high-expectation degree effect. You can However, in the initial stage of the introduction effect, in order to clarify that the type of input operation required for the player operation input effect is "continuous hit", be sure to display it in green corresponding to the "continuous hit" operation. Good. The performance control board 200 appropriately instructs the emission color based on the degree of expectation of the player operation input performance. Further, at this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (jingle) in accordance with the segment display and also outputs a sound "continuous hit!", So that the type of the input operation to be requested is the continuous hit operation of the effect button 3j. Notify that there is.

  After that, when the introduction effect progresses, the segment effect display device 74 uses the segment 741c (or the segment 741b may be used) to display the countdown segment ("3", "2", to notify the start of acceptance of the input operation). "1"). This countdown display is emitted in the same color (green or red) as the emission color of the previous "PUSH" segment display, or in red, which is upgraded from green. Although it has been described that the downgrade change from red to white is not performed in the above-described introduction effect of FIG. 78, the downgrade change from red to green is not performed in the introduction effect of FIG. 79 for the same reason. It is preferable. The production control board 200 decides whether or not to upgrade. In addition, at this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (jingle) in accordance with the segment display and also outputs a voice "I'm going!" To start accepting the input operation (start of the operation valid period). Informs that is approaching.

  When the introduction effect further progresses, the segment effect display device 74 uses the segment 741c (or the segment 741b may be used) to segment-display the countdown "0" to notify that the acceptance of the input operation is started. It is assumed that the emission color of "0" is the same as the emission color of the countdown "1". The segment display of the countdown “0” may not be performed. At this time, the speaker 11 notifies the start of acceptance of the input operation by outputting a voice "start" in synchronization with the segment display (or at a predetermined timing when segment display is not performed).

  Note that FIG. 79 is merely an example of the player operation input effect of continuous hitting according to the present embodiment. As another presentation mode, for example, in the introduction presentation, a character string of "Pb" may be displayed instead of the segment display for displaying the character string of "PUSH". However, in this case as well, it is preferable to start the emission color of the segment display from a specific color (green in this example) so that it can be distinguished from the operation types of other input operations.

  Next, the input time display effect shown in FIG. 79 will be described. When the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed ends, the input effect notification period is entered and the effective time display effect is started. As shown in FIG. 79, the control state of the operation acceptance control is switched from the "invalid period" to the "valid period" at the timing of transition from the introduction performance period to the input valid notification period. . In this way, by synchronizing the transition timing of the operation acceptance control with the transition timing of the presentation mode, it is possible to accurately invalidate the repeated hit operation performed earlier than the limited operation valid period, and to signal the start of the repeated hit (introduction). It is possible to effectively accept the continuous hitting operation of the player, which is started in accordance with the production “start!”).

  In the effective time display effect, the segment effect display device 74 performs the effect of notifying that the operation effective time is reduced as time passes. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), from the state where all the outer segs are turned on by using the segs 741a to 741c, the outer seg is gradually turned off (or dimmed) and the outer peripheral countdown. Display the segment by.

  The outer circumference countdown is executed using, for example, the entire operation valid period, and when the outer segment is completely extinguished, it is suggested that the operation valid period has ended (or that the operation valid period will soon end). Alternatively, the character string of "Pb" or the like may be segment-displayed for a certain period, and then the outer circumference countdown may be displayed in consideration of the end timing of the operation valid period.

  Here, in the player operation input effect of continuous hitting, during the input effective notification period (operation effective period), the display effect indicating the lapse or end of the operation effective period is being performed as in the outer circumference countdown display described above. In addition, it is required that the player repeatedly presses the effect button 3j. Therefore, an effect mode in the case where this pressing operation is repeatedly performed will be described. It should be noted that, as is common to the player operation input effects according to other operation types, in the player operation input effects according to the present embodiment, in the effective time display effects, a display effect indicating the lapse or end of the operation effective period. Rather, it is preferable to display the display effect generated according to the input operation with higher priority. By doing so, the reaction by the input operation is clearly displayed, and it can be expected that the player feels that he / she is participating in the production and the interest is enhanced. However, the present embodiment is not limited to separately displaying the both display effects described above, and may be a partial mixed display.

  Referring to FIG. 79, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 3j during the operation valid period, the segment display of the outer circumference countdown is temporarily turned off and the speaker is simultaneously turned off each time the effect button 3j is pressed. 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (SE) corresponding to the pressing operation. These controls are performed by the production control board 200. The effect control board 200 may reduce the brightness of the LED (dim) or change the emission color (for example, blue emission) instead of temporarily turning off the light. As the internal processing relating to the temporary turning off of the segment display by the production control board 200, for example, by forcibly covering the processing for generating the basic data for the effective time display production with predetermined off data for turning off the segment display, The segment display (outer circumference countdown display) based on basic data can be temporarily turned off. Then, the segment display is returned to the outer circumference countdown again after the temporary extinguishment is performed for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the countdown may be made to proceed in the background even during the temporary light-off, and the remaining count at the present time may be segment-displayed when the outer circumference countdown is restored.

  In this example, the above-mentioned effective time display effect does not stop in the middle like the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of single push, and a predetermined operation effective period (input effective notification period) It will be continued until the end. For example, in the case of FIG. 79, it is shown that the pressing operation of the effect button 3j is executed 6 times during the operation valid period, and the operation acceptance control effectively accepts each operation, and the input information corresponding to each operation. Is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  As another mode of the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of repeated hits, for example, a character string of "PUSH" or "Pb" may be blinked to perform segment display. In this case, it is possible to notify that the effective operation time is decreasing by increasing the blinking speed (blinking period) or shortening the lighting time with the passage of time.

  Further, as yet another mode of the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of continuous hits, the countdown display and the result display by the continuous hit operation may be combined and displayed in segments. Such a segment display method is referred to as a “continuous hitting challenge”, and a specific example will be described below.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the segment display in the repeated hit challenge. In FIG. 80, a transition example of the segment display in the continuous hit challenge is shown in time series. In the continuous hit challenge of FIG. 80, in the segment effect display device 74, a countdown display of the operation effective period (effective period) is performed by the segments 741a and 741b, and a result display based on the input operation (pressing) of the effect button 3j is performed by the segment 741c. Is done.

  FIG. 80 (A) is an example of a segment display immediately after the start of the repeated hitting challenge. The countdown display by the segments 741a and 741b is green "18", and the segment display of the segment display 741c is yellow and all illuminated.

  After FIG. 80 (A), the continuous hitting challenge continues until the countdown display becomes “0”, and the segment lighting pattern of the result display may change each time the effect button 3j is pressed. . For example, in FIG. 80 (B), in response to pressing of the effect button 3j, the result display by the segment 741c changes to the state in which one LED on the outer circumference is turned off. In addition, even if the effect button 3j is pressed, the result display LED may not be turned off. When the effect button 3j is pressed, the speaker 11 may output a predetermined sound effect (SE) corresponding to the pressing operation, and the result display LED may be turned off or may not be turned off. Different SEs may be output.

  The countdown display and the result display also change in the same manner from FIG. 80 (D) to FIG. 80 (E). In this example, when the remaining time of the countdown is short (for example, FIG. 80E), the emission color of the countdown display changes to red. Further, when the result display is in the final stage (for example, when the number of remaining lighting LEDs is one as shown in FIG. 80E), the emission color of the result display changes to red.

  80 (F) and 80 (G) are transition examples in the case where the continuous hit challenge is a successful result. When the result display by the segment 741c is completely extinguished in response to the production button 3j being pressed (FIG. 80 (F)), after the countdown ends (FIG. 80 (G)), the segment production display in the post-operation production. The device 74 displays a character string of “good” or the like to notify the success result. In FIG. 80G, after the operation (operation), the emission color of the countdown display “0” (or from the display before the display of “0”) is changed to the rainbow color that makes it possible to feel the confirmation of success. It is possible to suggest the success result of the production earlier than the start of the (post production period).

  On the other hand, FIG. 80 (H) and FIG. 80 (I) are transition examples in the case where the repeated hit challenge results in failure. In the case of FIG. 80 (H), even if the effect button 3j is pressed, the result display by the segment 741c is not completely turned off, and the lighting by some LEDs remains. When the countdown ends in this state (FIG. 80 (I)), "---" is displayed by the segment effect display device 74 in the subsequent post-operation effect, and the failure result is notified. Note that, in FIG. 80 (I), the failure result of the main effect is suggested in advance by setting the emission color of the countdown display "0" to be a white color different from the previous colors.

  By using such a continuous hitting challenge display method, it is possible to realize the effective time display effect in an effect mode suitable for the operation mode of continuous hitting. In addition, in the continuous hit challenge, the transition of the result display by the segment 741c is not limited to the example of FIG. For example, according to the number of times the effect button 3j is pressed, not only one LED for displaying the result may be turned off, but also a pattern in which a plurality of LEDs are turned off may be included. In addition, as a presentation mode having a low appearance rate, there may be a pattern in which all the LEDs are suddenly turned off to suggest success.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 80, the countdown value of maximum 2 digits (however, the upper digit is “1” or “no display”) is displayed in the countdown display using the segments 741a and 741b, but the countdown display of the repeated hit challenge is Not limited to this, the countdown display can be performed by giving different meanings to the segment 741a and the segment 741b. Specifically, for example, the continuous hitting challenge is started from the same display as in FIG. 80A, and the LEDs on the outer periphery of the segment 741b are turned off one by one with the passage of time. Then, every time all the LEDs (6 LEDs) on the outer circumference of the segment 741b are extinguished (every time the extinguishment is completed once), one LED of the segment 741a is extinguished. After that, all the LEDs on the outer circumference of the segment 741b are turned on again and turned off again. When this is repeated, when the LEDs on the outer periphery of the segment 741b are turned off three times, that is, when the LEDs on the outer periphery of the segment 741b are extinguished 18 times in total, all the LEDs of the segment 741a are turned off. The end of the countdown (the end of the valid operation period) can be notified by turning off all the segments 741a.

  When the continuous hitting challenge includes a plurality of patterns of presentation modes as described above, the pattern of the continuous hitting challenge may be distinguishable by making the emission color and the emission brightness of the segment display different for each pattern. Further, based on the degree of expectation that a success result is obtained, it may be possible to select which pattern is to be derived in the continuous hit challenge.

  Further, in FIG. 79, there is a portion marked with "*" in the effective time display effect. This means that when a predetermined input operation (pressing operation of the effect button 3j in this example) is not performed during the input valid notification period, the "prompting effect" that prompts the input operation can be executed. Means In the reminder effect, for example, a character string such as “PUSH” or “Pb” is segment-displayed, and a voice of “continuous hit” is output from the speaker 11.

  In addition, the determination of the "non-operation time" that triggers execution of the reminder effect may be determined by the effect control board 200 based on a predetermined determination criterion. Specifically, for example, it may be set when the input operation is not performed even once during the input valid notification period (operation valid period), or a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) during the input valid notification period (operation valid period). This may be set when only the following input operation is performed. In addition, a counter for counting the elapsed time from the latest input operation in the input valid notification period (operation valid period) is provided, and when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), that is, in the operation valid period. It may be set when the non-operation period of the input operation reaches a predetermined time. In this case, if the counter is reset each time an input operation is performed, then the reminder effect can be executed again, and if the counter is not reset, after the reminder effect is executed once, the non-operation is the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reminder effect from being executed again.

  By thus executing the reminder effect when not in operation, the player can be urged to repeatedly press the effect button 3j, so that the input operation required by the player is referred to as "single press" or "long press". If you are misunderstood, you can assist in performing appropriate input operations. In addition, it can play a role of assisting a player who misses or misses the introduction effect.

  Next, the post-operation effect shown in FIG. 79 will be described. When the effective time display effect (input effective notification period) ends, the after-operation effect period is executed and the after-operation effect is executed. At this time, the control state of the operation acceptance control is also switched from the “effective period” to the “ineffective period” at the timing of shifting from the input effective notification period to the post-operation performance period. In this way, by synchronizing the transition timing of the operation acceptance control with the transition timing of the effect mode, it is possible to accurately invalidate the repeated hitting operation performed over the limited operation valid period.

  In the post-operation effect, the result based on the continuous hitting input operation performed during the effective time display effect (input effective notification period) is used during the introduction effect or the effective time display effect using the segment effect display device 74 or the speaker 11. Is displayed in a different manner. The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or if the success or failure of the input operation is selected by lottery, the result of the lottery is selected. Good. Further, as a method of determining a result specialized for a continuous hitting input operation, for example, a success result may be displayed on the condition that the input operation is performed a predetermined number of times.

  In FIG. 79, as an example of a specific effect mode of the post-operation effect, “good” is displayed in a blue or red segment display, and a predetermined sound effect (SE) is output by the sound output from the speaker 11. It is shown. However, the effect mode of the post-operation effect is not limited to the above example, and various other effect modes may be adopted as described in the post-operation effect of the player operation input effect of single press. it can.

  The player operation input effect of continuous hitting has been described above in detail, but in the following, the change in the emission color of the segment display will be supplemented. In the player operation input effect of continuous hitting described above with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the emission color of the segment display may be changed according to the continuous hit condition of the effect button 3j in the middle of the effective time display effect. explained. Specifically, the emission color of the segment display of the outer circumference countdown is changed from blue to red, and the emission color of the result display in the repeated hit challenge is changed from yellow to red. In the present embodiment, whether or not such a change in the emission color can be executed is determined according to the degree of expectation of the main effect being executed by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and based on the number of times the effect button 3j is operated. It is possible to control the change of the emission color.

  As a specific control method, for example, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) uses the change pattern of the decorative symbol determined based on the change pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 29 and FIG. 30) as the input information. An advance notice pattern is selected, and changes in emission color (change timing and change conditions) are controlled according to the advance notice pattern selected. More specifically, the advance notice pattern lottery will be described in more detail. A advance notice pattern X in which the emission color change occurs and a advance notice pattern Y in which the emission color change does not occur are prepared, and a plurality of types of variation patterns in which the player operation input effect is executed. (For example, a variation pattern A with a low expectation and a variation time of 15 seconds and a variation pattern B with a high expectation and a variation time of 30 seconds), the notice patterns X and Y are randomly selected by different allocation. At this time, by making the variation pattern B easier to select the advance notice pattern X than the variation pattern A, in the player operation input production executed in the middle of the main production based on the high expectation variation pattern B, the emission color A change can be easily generated. The fluctuation patterns A and B are not limited to those having different fluctuation times, and may have different reach types. Furthermore, as for the advance notice patterns to be selected by lottery, a plurality of advance notice patterns X1 to X3 having different numbers of operations in which the emission color change occurs may be prepared.

  The notice pattern lottery regarding the change of the emission color as described above is not limited to the continuous operation of the player operation input effect, and the player operation input effect by another operation mode such as single press or long press. Can also be applied to the change of the emission color (change of the emission color upgrade).

<Player operation input production (long press)>
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of long-pressed player operation input effect. The long-pressed player operation input effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81.

  First, the introduction effect is started in the introduction effect period, and it is suggested / informed that a long press input operation to the effect button 3j is required. As a concrete representation mode, for example, the segment effect display device 74 first uses the segments 741b and 741c to segment-display the character string “PUSH” in purple or red (see also FIG. 77 (A)). In this example, the purple segment display indicates that it is a player operation input effect of a “long press” operation, and the red segment display indicates high expectation. In the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the light emission color of the segment display is changed to a specific color (for example, red) at each stage along with the progress of the effect in order to suggest that it is a high-expectation degree effect. You can However, in the initial stage of the introduction effect, in order to clarify that the type of input operation required for the player operation input effect is "long press", it must be displayed in purple corresponding to the "long press" operation. You may

  Next, the segment effect display device 74 performs segment display in which the countdown is sequentially performed in purple or red with “3”, “2”, and “1”. At this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined effect sound (jingle) and then outputs a voice “preparation”. In addition, in order to prevent a change in emission color downgrade in the segment display, if the red segment display is performed in the previous “PUSH” stage, the countdown segment display may be limited to red. Good. This kind of prevention of downgrade is the same at other stages described later.

  Then, when the introduction effect period approaches the end, the segment effect display device 74 displays the character strings in the order of “PU”, “−−”, and “SH” in purple or red in the order of the segment, and thereby the effect button 3j is displayed. Notify the start of pushing. At this time, the speaker 11 outputs a voice output with a long sound, such as "Poo-shu!", Thereby notifying by voice that the push operation is performed for a long time.

  Note that the presentation mode of the introduction presentation shown in FIG. 81 is merely an example. As another presentation mode, for example, in the introduction presentation, the character string of "Pb" instead of "PUSH" may be segment-displayed. Further, the countdown of "3" to "1" may not be displayed in segments. Further, as an effect mode in which the long press is further emphasized, the character strings of “Long” (see FIG. 76B) and “PUSH” may be displayed in segments. Further, as another effect mode in which the long press is further emphasized, it is possible to display the character strings “PUSH” and “Hold” in segments. In addition, as for the presentation mode of the sound output by the speaker 11, a dedicated sound source may be used because it is often a special presentation when a long-press input operation is required.

  When the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed ends, the input effect notification period is entered and the effective time display effect is started. As shown in FIG. 81, the control state of the operation acceptance control is switched from the “invalid period” to the “valid period” at the timing of transition from the introduction performance period to the input valid notification period. .

  In the effective time display effect, the segment effect display device 74 performs the effect of notifying that the operation effective time is reduced as time passes. Specifically, for example, similarly to the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of continuous hitting shown in FIG. 79, the outer circumference countdown display is performed in the emission color of blue or red (see FIG. 77 (C)).

  Here, in the long-pressed player operation input effect, the player continues to press down the effect button 3j during the input effective notification period (operation effective period). At this time, as also shown in FIG. 81, while the effect button 3j is being pressed, the segment display of the outer circumference countdown is temporarily turned off, and then the segments 741a to 741c of the segments 741a to 741c are displayed according to the lapse of time during which the pressing operation continues. The LEDs will light up sequentially. Furthermore, when the pressing operation of the effect button 3j continues even after the LEDs of the segments 741a to 741c are sequentially turned on and all are turned on, the segment effect display device 74 changes the emission colors of all the LEDs stepwise. As a specific color change, for example, in order of white, blue, yellow, green, red, a general player adopts a color change that is expected to improve the expectation, and depending on the final emission color, It indicates the degree of expectation of successful results. A rainbow color that suggests the confirmation of the success result may be adopted as the emission color. Further, although the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (SE), it is preferable that the volume and scale of the speaker 11 are also changed according to the lapse of time during which the pressing operation is continued.

  The lighting control of the segments 741a to 741c (temporarily turned off-sequential lighting-sequential color change) in the above long-press player operation input effect is determined by the effect control board 200 by determining the number of presses during the long-press operation. It is realized by performing lighting control of the segments 741a to 741c based on the number of times of pressing. The method of determining the number of presses during the long press operation will be described in detail. When the effect button 3j is pressed during the operation valid period, the device management process of the main loop process executed by the effect control board 200 (step S820 in FIG. 55). ), The number of pressings is counted as 1 in the main loop process and the interrupt process at every cycle (16 ms in this embodiment) that is easy to synchronize with the lamp control. Then, the effect control board 200 proceeds to sequentially turn on until a predetermined number of times (for example, the 30th time) of pressing times are counted, and controls to turn on all in about 0.5 seconds. When the number of times of pressing is advanced, until the number of times of pressing of another predetermined number of times (for example, the 50th time, the 80th time, etc.) is counted, the color change of the luminescent color is gradually performed based on the determination of the number of pressings. Control. In addition, you may use the interruption period (1 ms in this embodiment) in the production | generation control board 200 for the count period of the number of presses.

  In this way, in the effective time display effect, the effect mode of the segment display (or sound output) is changed by continuing the long press operation, so that it is possible to promote the maintenance of the long press operation while increasing the interest of the player. In the case where the countdown progresses in the background even during the change of the effect mode during the long-press operation of the effect button 3j, and the long-press operation of the effect button 3j is released before the transition condition to the post-operation effect period is satisfied. , The outer circumference countdown display is restarted and the remaining counts are displayed in segments. In the figure, the process at the time of re-operation when the operation is canceled in the middle is expressed by starting from the sequential lighting (first process), but when the sequential color change is reached, when the operation is canceled Instead of shifting to the countdown, the display of the released timing may be used as the handover display, and it may be determined whether or not the mode is changed to the subsequent mode when the operation is restarted.

  Further, as another effect mode of the effective time display effect, a segment display similar to the continuous hit challenge (FIG. 80) shown in the above-described player operation input effect of continuous hit can be performed. In this case, the countdown display may be performed by the effective period display by the segments 741a and 741b, and the result based on the long press operation may be displayed by the result display by the segment 741c. The segment display of the result display may be changed according to the pressing time during which the long press operation is performed, but as a difference from FIG. 80, the result display starts from the off state and is turned on (successfully). It is preferable to change it so that the number of lights is gradually increased.

  Note that, in FIG. 81, there is a portion marked with “*” in the effective time display effect, but as described above with reference to FIG. 79, this is a predetermined input operation (here, the effect button is used). This means that the “prompting effect” that prompts the input operation can be executed when it is determined that the “non-operation” has not been performed). Since it is repeated, detailed description of the reminder effect is omitted.

  In the long-pressed player operation input effect, the effective time display effect is continued until the predetermined operation effective period (input effective notification period) ends. When the effective time display effect (input effective notification period) ends, the post-operation effect period is executed and the post-operation effect is executed. The control state of the operation acceptance control is switched from the “effective period” to the “ineffective period” at the timing of shifting from the input effective notification period to the post-operation performance period.

  In the post-operation effect, the result based on the continuous hitting input operation performed during the effective time display effect (input effective notification period) is used during the introduction effect or the effective time display effect using the segment effect display device 74 or the speaker 11. Is displayed in a different manner. The specific presentation mode is the same as that shown in FIG. 79 and the like, and description thereof is omitted. The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or if the success or failure of the input operation is selected by lottery, the result of the lottery is selected. Good.

<Player operation input production (attraction)>
The player operation input effect of attraction will be described. As described above, the pulling means an input operation (drawing operation) on the second effect button 3k having a lever structure. Generally, the input operation to the second effect button 3k is completed by performing a single pull-in operation during the operation valid period, and when the operation target is replaced with the effect button 3j, A player operation input effect can be realized in an effect mode similar to a single push on the button 3j. More specifically, as the attraction player operation input effect, the single push player operation input effect illustrated in FIG. 75 and FIG. 78 can be used for the effect period and operation acceptance control transition.

  In the following, the effect transition of the attracted player operation input effect will be described. First, similarly to FIG. 75, the introduction effect is started in the introduction effect period, and at this time, the control state of the operation reception control is set to the “ineffective period”. In the attraction-in effect, the segment effect display device 74 uses the segments 741b and 741c to display a character string that indicates a pull-in operation for the second effect button 3k (for example, “PULL” shown in FIG. 77 (B)). ) Is displayed in segments. According to this segment display, a predetermined sound effect (jingle) is output by the sound output by the speaker 11, and then a voice such as “lever preparation ..... close!” Is output to pull the second effect button 3k. It may be emphasized that a side operation is required. The display timing of "close!" Is preferably immediately before the start of the input valid notification period at the end of the introduction production period.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second effect button 3k may be configured such that the pulling-in operation becomes effective after a predetermined preparation operation. Specifically, for example, a lever-shaped second effect button 3k called a "drive gear" is normally fixed to a standby position, and at the time of operation, the fixation is released and the operation button is moved to a predetermined operation position and then operated. It is assumed that the lever operation (pull-in operation) that is tilted to the front can be executed during the effective period. In the case of such a structure, as another example of the segment display in the introduction effect, first, the character string of "dg" indicating the initials of "drive gear" is segment-displayed, and the operation shifts to the operation valid period in which the lever operation is possible. The character string "PULL" may be displayed in front. Also, the speaker 11 may output a voice such as "Lever is preparing" during the segment display of "dg", and may output a voice such as "Retract!" When the segment display of "PULL" is displayed. .

  In addition, the segment display of "PULL" and "dg" in the attraction introduction effect is from the emission of a specific color (for example, orange color) that suggests that the player operation input effect is the attraction operation of the second effect button 3k. By starting it, it can be distinguished from other operation types. However, considering that the second effect button 3k is a more prominent effect button than the effect button 3j, the second effect button 3k does not emit a specific color capable of distinguishing the operation type, but emits red light that indicates a high degree of expectation. You may

  When the introduction effect in the introduction effect period ends, the input effective notification period starts, and the effective time display effect starts. Here, the control state of the operation acceptance control is, as in the case of the single press shown in FIG. 75 or the like, at least until the effective time display effect is started after the transition to the input effective notification period and the second effect button. It is switched to the "valid period" in which the input operation of 3k is valid. Note that, as in the case of single push, in consideration of the case where the player immediately performs the input operation in response to the segment display "PULL" and the sound output "shrink" in the introduction effect, from the end of the introduction effect period. The control state may be switched to the valid period.

  The effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of attraction is the effective time shown in FIG. 75, FIG. 78, etc. after replacing the segment display of “PUSH” or “Pb” with “PULL” or “dg”. It can be realized by also using the effect mode in the display effect. Details are omitted because they will be repeated.

  When an effective time display effect peculiar to the pull-in operation is to be performed, for example, using the segments 741b and 741c, "PU", "LL", "-(up / up)", "--- It is also possible to repeatedly display the segment display of "(middle / middle)" and "-(middle / middle)". At this time, the operation type of the pulling operation is notified by the segment display of “PULL”, and a dynamic image of tilting the lever of the second effect button 3k is presented by the segment display in which “−−” moves from the upper stage to the lower stage. It

  Further, in the repetition of the segment display, the emission color of the segment display may be gradually changed with the lapse of time (for example, in accordance with the number of repetitions) as in the case of single-shot pressing as described above. Specifically, for example, in the effective time display effect, a series of “PU”, “LL”, “−− (upper / upper)”, “−− (middle / middle)”, “−− (lower / lower)” When repeating the segment display of 4 times, if the emission color of each time is changed in the order of red, green, yellow, and blue, make the user feel that the degree of expectation gradually decreases with the passage of time. You can By performing such a color change, the player is urged to promptly perform the input operation to the second effect button 3k with high expectation, and the execution opportunity is being lost due to the passage of time (the operation effective period is There is little remaining). In addition, since the degree of expectation does not actually change with the passage of time, in order to not disappoint the player whose input operation has been delayed, the color that is less relevant to the degree of expectation or the degree of expectation The emission color may be changed in an order in which it is difficult to associate improvement / decrease.

  Then, in the effective time display effect, when the drawing operation of the second effect button 3k is performed or when the predetermined operation effective period has elapsed, the input effective notification period is shifted to the after-operation effect period, and the after-operation effect is performed. Is started. The effect mode of the after-operation effect can be realized in the same effect mode as the after-operation effect in the player operation input effect of single push, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, when the input effective notification period is shifted to the post-operation production period, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "valid period" to the "ineffective period", and thereafter, at least until the player operation input production is finished. The input operation of the second effect button 3k is invalidated. As described above, when the second effect button 3k is in the work position, the operation of returning to the standby position may be performed after switching to the "ineffective period".

  As described above, the effect control board 200 can execute the player operation input effect of attracting the second effect button 3k in an effect mode that can be distinguished from other operation types.

  In addition, although the player operation input effect of pulling similar to single-shot pressing has been described above, in the present embodiment, the player operation input effect by another operation type of the pulling operation, specifically, the second effect. For player operation input production corresponding to “pulling continuous hits” that requires multiple pulling operations of the button 3k or “pulling long press” that requires an operation to keep the second rendering button 3k attracted. The application is not excluded. Although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the player operation input effect of "pulling continuous hits", the operation for the second effect button 3k is performed in accordance with the player operation input effect of continuous hits described above with reference to FIG. It suffices to configure the effect mode to be requested, and in the case of the player operation input effect of "pull-and-hold long press", the second effect button according to the long-press player operation input effect described above with reference to FIG. 81. It suffices to configure an effect mode that requests an operation for 3k.

<Player operation input production (automatic continuous hit)>
The player operation input effect of automatic continuous hitting will be described. As described above, the automatic continuous hitting is a valid operation period when the automatic continuous hitting function that the pachinko machine 1 can have is enabled (ON) by the customization function that can be set by the player or as the specification of the gaming machine. Means that the effect button 3j is continuously pressed. At this time, while the pressing operation of the effect button 3j continues, it is considered that the same input operation as the continuous hit of the effect button 3j is performed, and the input information corresponding to one input operation is predetermined. It is repeatedly transmitted to the effect control board 200 at intervals.

  In general, in a situation where automatic continuous hitting of the effect button 3j is effectively accepted, continuous hitting operation of the effect button 3j by the player is also effectively accepted. Therefore, the player operation input effect of automatic continuous hit can be realized in the same effect mode as the player operation input effect of continuous hit described above with reference to FIG. 79 and the like, except for the mode of pressing the effect button 3j by the player. Yes, detailed description is omitted.

  In addition, when it is desired to execute the player operation input effect of continuous hits while clearly indicating that the automatic consecutive hits are effective, in the introduction effect, a specific color that suggests that the player operation input effect of the “continuous hit” operation is performed ( Instead of the segment display of green in this example, a segment display in another light emission mode suggesting that it is a player operation input performance in which “automatic continuous hit” operation is also possible (for example, a segment that alternately emits green and purple) (Display) may be performed.

<Player operation input production (automatic operation)>
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of the player operation input effect of single press when the automatic operation is valid. FIG. 82 shows a case where the automatic operation function is set to be valid for the player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single press when the automatic operation function is set to be disabled (when the automatic operation is disabled) illustrated in FIG. When the automatic operation is enabled (in the case where the automatic operation is valid), an example of how the performance is performed is illustrated. Hereinafter, the features of the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is valid will be described in detail by referring to FIG. 82 while comparing with FIG. 75.

  First, like the other player operation input effects when the automatic operation is disabled as described above, the introduction effect is started in the introduction effect period. As can be seen by comparing with FIG. 75, among the effect modes of the introduction effect, the segment display may be the same as that when the automatic operation is disabled, and the emission color thereof is white corresponding to the “single press” operation. Regarding the sound output, when the automatic operation is valid, it is not necessary to request the player to perform the input operation of the effect button. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 82, the special sound output is not performed. However, this is an example, and the same sound output as when the automatic operation is disabled (in the case of FIG. 75, a voice output of “press” after jingle) may be used, or a sound output for notifying that the automatic operation is valid. (For example, a voice output such as “automatic operation preparation”) may be performed.

  The control state of the operation acceptance control is controlled in the same manner as when the automatic operation is disabled. That is, at the start of the introduction production, the "invalid period" is set, and at least by the time the transition from the introduction production period to the input valid notification period is made, the "effective period" is switched. In the case of FIG. 82, since it is based on FIG. 75, the “effective period” is switched not at the same time as shifting to the input valid notification period but at the preceding timing. In this way, by controlling the operation acceptance control in the same manner as when the automatic operation is disabled, it is not necessary to increase the control pattern by the effect control board 200.

  Next, when the input valid notification period is entered, the valid time display effect is started. The effect mode of the effective time display effect may be the same effect mode as when the automatic operation is disabled (see FIG. 75), but FIG. 82 shows an example of the effect mode unique to the effective time display effect when the automatic operation is effective. Has been done.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the effective time display effect, the segment display of the outer peripheral countdown is performed with a blue emission color. Since the player's operation is not required, segment display such as "Pb" in FIG. 75 is not performed. The transition of the segment display in the outer circumference countdown may be the same as in the example of FIG. 77 (C), but as a feature when the automatic operation is valid, the time until the automatic operation (deemed operation) is performed is counted down, not the operation valid period. indicate. Specifically, the time value until the automatic operation is performed may be displayed in a countdown, or the count value "0" may be displayed at the execution timing of the automatic operation while displaying the countdown display of the operation valid period. The countdown speed may be increased so that Then, at the timing of the automatic operation (deemed operation), the segment display is performed in a red color different from that during the countdown display (the display content is arbitrary, for example, all the LEDs of the segments 741a to 741c are turned on), which is preferable. It is suggested that a process corresponding to such an input operation (in this example, a single press of the effect button 3k) is automatically executed. As another example, a method may be considered in which one LED of the outer peripheral LEDs of the segments 741a to 741c is displayed in red in advance so as to suggest the timing at which the automatic operation (deemed operation) is performed.

  In the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled, it is not necessary for the player to operate the effect button. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the "prompting effect" described above regarding the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is disabled. Absent.

  Then, since it is considered that the single-push input operation is performed by the execution of the deemed operation, the input condition regarding the input operation is satisfied. Therefore, the input valid notification period ends, the post-operation performance period is started, and the post-operation performance is started. At this time, the control state of the operation acceptance control is switched from the “valid period” to the “invalid period”, and thereafter, the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalid at least until the main player operation input effect is completed.

  In the post-operation effect, the result based on the automatic operation (deemed operation) is displayed using the segment effect display device 74 and the speaker 11 in a mode different from that during the introduction effect and the effective time display effect. In the case of FIG. 82, the effect mode of the post-operation effect is the same as in the case of FIG. 75, with a predetermined sound effect (SE), and in the case of a success result, the character string of “good” is displayed in a blue segment and the failure result. In the case of, the character string of "---" is segment-displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the automatic operation function is set to be valid, the player performs a predetermined input operation on the operation button (in this example, the effect button 3j) during the operation valid period. When the single operation is performed), the effect control board 200 may effectively accept the input operation as in the case where the automatic operation is not set. In such a case, the effect control board 200 performs the effect control corresponding to the time when the automatic operation is not set until the result display (post-operation effect) of the current player operation input effect is completed, triggered by the input operation. Then, how to set (valid / invalid) the automatic operation function after the post-operation performance is finished depends on the specifications. By such control, even when the automatic operation function is enabled, when the player wants to perform an input operation for a specific player operation input effect, the input operation by the player is performed. Since the production can be prioritized, it can be expected to improve the player's satisfaction.

  However, even if an input operation is performed by the player during the operation valid period when the automatic operation function is enabled and the post-operation performance based on the input operation is performed, the subsequent setting of the automatic operation function is performed. How to set (valid / invalid) depends on the specifications of the gaming machine.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display for performing variable display and effect display of decorative symbols, setting of the automatic operation function even during variable display of symbols, etc. Since it is easy to respond to the change on the liquid crystal screen, the effect control board 200 automatically operates when the operation button is operated by the player while the automatic operation function is set to be effective. The valid setting of the operation function may be canceled (the automatic operation may be disabled), and the fact may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen to notify the user.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case where the pachinko machine 1 does not include the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display that performs variable display and effect display of decorative symbols, for example, includes the drum type effect display device 71. , It is not easy to inform about the change of the setting of the automatic operation function during the variable display of the symbols. Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, when the automatic operation function is set to valid, during the variable display of the symbol (including the operation valid period, except for the "special fluctuation display" described later) Even if the operation button is operated by the player, the setting of the automatic operation function is not changed (however, as described above, it is possible to effectively accept the input operation performed during the operation effective period and proceed the production process. ) Is preferable.

  Furthermore, the setting change operation of the automatic operation function in the case where the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display for performing variable display and effect display of decorative symbols will be supplemented. As an operation method for switching the setting of “valid” and “invalid” of the automatic operation function in such a pachinko machine 1, for example, the following operation method can be specified. First, the setting of the automatic operation function may be switched when a long press operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a press operation for 3 seconds or more) is executed during the game standby (during the demo screen display). Further, as an example corresponding to “during special variation display” shown in the previous stage, some variation patterns (for example, loss variation that does not develop into reach production or loss variation that does not cause fanning production. So-called variation of loss). The setting of the automatic operation function may be switched when a long-pressing operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a pressing operation for 3 seconds or more) is performed during the symbol change. In addition, as another example corresponding to "during special change display" shown in the previous stage, during symbol fluctuation other than during execution of player operation input effect requiring operation of effect button 3j or second effect button 3k, or The setting of the automatic operation function may be switched when a long-pressing operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a pressing operation for 3 seconds or more) is executed during a pattern change other than the execution of the reach effect. Moreover, you may combine each specification mentioned above. By adopting the above-described specifications, even if the pachinko machine 1 does not include the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display for performing variable display and effect display of decorative symbols, the player is confused with other effect displays and the like. The setting switching of the automatic operation function can be realized in a difficult mode.

  Further, the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is valid has been described so far with reference to FIG. 82. However, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, a unique effect when the automatic operation is effective in the effective time display effect. The mode is not limited to the effect mode illustrated in FIG. 82. In addition, for example, when it is time to consider the operation with a count of “0”, the brightness of the LED is gradually reduced without turning off the segment display (for example, “0”) and finally turned off (fade out). ).

  Further, for example, similarly to the example given in the effective time display effect of single press described with reference to FIG. 75, even in the effective time display effect when the automatic operation is effective, the emission colors of the segment display are sequentially displayed in the countdown display. It may be changed. In this case, when the timing of the automatic operation arrives during the color change, the segment display is turned off to indicate that the automatic operation has been executed.

  The effect mode of the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled has been described in detail while comparing with the game mode in the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is disabled. Here, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, whether or not the effect mode can be shared when the automatic operation is valid and when the automatic operation is invalid can be summarized as follows.

  First, in the introduction effect (especially in the segment display), the effect mode may be made common when the automatic operation is valid and when the automatic operation is invalid. This is not limited to the case where the operation type of the input operation is “single press”, and the same applies to other operation types, that is, “continuous hit”, “long press”, or “pull”.

  Next, in the effective time display effect, in the case of a single press, the effect mode may be made common when the automatic operation is enabled and when the automatic operation is disabled, or may be a unique effect mode when the automatic operation is enabled. On the other hand, when the operation type is “continuous hit” or “long press”, the meaning of displaying a unique effect mode when the automatic operation is enabled is not significant in the effective time display effect, and therefore the same effect mode as when the automatic operation is disabled. Can be carried out in. In the case of "attracting", any of them may be used.

  In the post-operation performance, regardless of which operation type the input operation is, a common performance mode may be used when the automatic operation is valid and when the automatic operation is invalid, and it is possible to distinguish when the automatic operation is valid. You may As a concrete presentation mode that can be distinguished, for example, when the automatic operation is enabled, the volume of the sound effect (SE) is made smaller than when the automatic operation is disabled, or the result display (for example, the “good” segment display) is not performed. You can set it to However, when the result display by the player operation input effect raises the expectation of the player, it is preferable to display the result even if it is an automatic operation (in other words, if the result is a failure, the result display is intentionally displayed. You don't have to).

<Summary of player operation input production>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation type of the input operation to the operation means (production input device: production button 3j, second production button 3k) for production that can be operated by the player. The effect control board 200 notifies the input operation required by the introduction effect, notifies the operation effective period during which the input operation is effective by the effective time display effect, and notifies the result display based on the input operation by the after-operation effect. As a result, a player operation input effect can be realized.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment as described above, the player operation input effect described above can be realized by using a predetermined light emission effect device (for example, the segment effect display device 74), and thus the liquid crystal display device 70 is obtained. It is possible to notify the effective operation period of the operation means for effect in a manner that can be easily recognized by the player without using a dynamic image display means.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 inputs the player operation input effect like the specific examples shown in FIGS. 75 to 82 and the derivative examples described accompanying it. During the effective notification period, by causing the light emission effect device (segment effect display device 74) to perform the light emission effect according to the effect pattern of the player operation input effect, during the operation effective period of the effect input device (for example, effect button 3j). It is possible to notify not only whether or not it is, but also various information such as the degree of expectation of the effect and the remaining period of the operation valid period.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in a specific example in FIG. 75 and FIG. 78, the effect control board 200 causes the light emission effect device (during the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect). The light emission effect by the segment effect display device 74) is in any one of a normal mode (normal pattern) and a chance mode (chance pattern) indicating that the player is expected to benefit more than the normal mode. Since it can be executed with, it is possible to bring out an effect mode based on the degree of expectation, and it can be expected to have an effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 82 and the like for the player operation input effect for each operation type, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment has a predetermined input condition (result display in post-operation effect). There are provided a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes (for example, single press, continuous hit, long press, etc. on the effect button 3j) of the input operation to the effect input device for satisfying the input condition for performing. Then, the effect control board 200 performs the player operation input effect in the input effective notification period of the player operation input effect in an effect mode that is different for each effect pattern, such as performing segment display in a light emission color that distinguishes the operation type. By causing the light emission effect device (segment effect display device 74) to execute the light emission effect according to the effect pattern of, the player who sees the light emission effect device can easily identify the operation type of the required input operation. Thus, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is configured to include the drum-type effect display device 71 as a display for performing variable display and effect display of decorative symbols, it does not operate like the liquid crystal display device 70. The input operation required in the player operation input effect can be easily notified and suggested without using a typical image display means.

  It should be noted that, up to this point, with respect to the effect mode of the player operation input effect, the realization method has been described in which the segment display by the segment effect display device 74 is mainly used and the sound output by the speaker 11 assists. A part or all of the effect display by the input effect is replaced with the segment effect display device 74, and an effect control board 200 other than the effect display device (the liquid crystal display device 70 or the drum type effect display device 71) that performs the variable display of the decorative design. It may be realized by being applied to “another light emitting device” whose lighting is controlled by.

  As a concrete candidate of another light emitting device, first, the frame lamp 10 or the panel lamp 25 whose lighting is controlled by the lamp effect control means 230 of the effect control board 200 can be mentioned. In the case of the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25, the lighting control thereof is used to represent a part or all of the effect display. As another candidate, a light emitting device such as a lamp provided near or inside the effect button 3j (or the second effect button 3k) (for example, an LED inside the effect button or an expectation degree display LED 76, or in addition to these) It may be a provided light guide plate or the like). For example, when the expectation degree display LED 76 is a full-color LED, a part or all of the effect display can be expressed by the lighting control of the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25 as in the case of the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25. When the expectation degree display LED 76 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (mini liquid crystal), the input operation of the effect button 3j is requested by displaying a button image simulating the effect button 3j on the liquid crystal display screen. Is possible.

  In the present embodiment, even when the player operation input effect is realized by using the above “other light emitting device”, the same effect as the player operation input effect using the segment effect display device 74 described above is obtained. I can expect that. For example, it can be expected to inform the operation effective period of the operation means for the effect in a mode that the player can easily recognize without using the image display means by the effect display device that performs the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  Further, even when the display is performed by the other lamps described above (for example, the lamp provided on the effect button 3j of the glass frame 3), the light-emission display indicating the effective period is made in cooperation with the segment effect display device 74 on the game board. It may be configured to be executed. The linked display may be the one in which the colors of the light emission, the blinking cycle, or the like are the same, or it is possible to identify the valid period in a light emission mode similar to the display of the segment effect display device 74 with only the color of the light emission being common. Anything will do. In this way, as long as the other lamps are controlled so as to be interlocked with each other, the display is executed on the other lamps even in a specific situation where the effective period is not (cannot be) notified by the segment effect display device 74. It may be possible.

  The pachinko machine has been described above as an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine. That is, a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a management gaming machine that does not require gaming balls, gaming medals, etc. (enclosed gaming machine, medalless The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine), a casino machine, and the like.

  1: Pachinko machine, 2: Outer frame, 2a-2d: Frame, 2e, 2f: Hinge member, 2p: Door open sensor, 3: Glass frame (door frame), 3a, 3b: Hinge mechanism, 3c: Locking device, 3d: through-hole, 3e: base unit, 3f: dish unit, 3g: area, 3h: frame lamp (LED lamp), 3i: speaker, 3j: effect button, 3k: second effect button, 4: front frame, 4a : Handle, 4b: Frame, 4c, 4d: Hinge, 4e: Launching device, 4f: Locking unit, 4g: Substrate unit, 4h: Back cover, 4i, 4j: Hinge member, 4p: Door open detection member, 5 : Game board, 5a: Game area, 5b: Main control unit, 5c: Peripheral control unit, 8: Upper ball plate, 9: Lower ball plate, 10: Performance lamp (frame lamp), 11: Space Maker, 12: launch handle, 13: ball feed mechanism, 14: launch mechanism, 15: production button, 20A: game area, 22: center decoration, 25: production lamp (board lamp), 29: first outlet. , 31: storage tank, 34: prize ball payout unit, 61: first starting opening, 62: second starting opening, 63: gate, 64: big winning opening, 66: general winning opening, 70: liquid crystal display device, 71 : Drum-type effect display device, 72: Light guide plate, 73: Sub effect display device, 74: Seg effect display device, 75: Hold display LED, 76: Expectation degree display LED, 77: Nail part, 78 (78a, 78b) ): Small movable accessory, 91: Lamp connection board, 92: Motor driver, 100: Main control board, 100a: Front member, 100b: Game panel, 100c: Function display Knit, 100d: Inner rail, 100e: Out taxiway, 100f: Outer rail, 100h: Opening, 100m: Front unit, 100n: Main control board case, 100p: Harness cover, 100q: Setting key switch, 101: Main control CPU , 101B: strobe signal output port, 102: main control ROM, 103: main control RAM, 104: I / O port circuit, 109: production control board connection connector, 110: ball entry determining means, 111: data bus, 112: Strobe signal bus, 120: Game lottery random number generation means, 123: Normal electric accessory solenoid, 124: Special electric accessory solenoid, 130: Hold control means, 131: Special symbol hold control means, 132: Normal symbol hold control means, 135: Predetermination means, 140: Special Symbol lottery processing means, 141: Special symbol hit / miss determining means, 142: Special symbol stop symbol determining means, 143: Special symbol variation pattern determining means, 145: Normal symbol lottery processing means, 146: Normal symbol appropriateness determining means, 147: Normal Symbol stop symbol determination means, 148: Normal symbol variation pattern determination means, 150: Special game control means, 155: Symbol display control means, 156: Special symbol display control means, 157: Normal symbol display control means, 160: Electric accessory Control means, 161: first starting opening switch, 162: second starting opening switch, 163: operating gate switch, 164: special winning opening switch, 166: general winning opening switch, 167: out ball detection switch, 169: gaming state Control means, 170: Error monitoring control means, 171: First special symbol display Position, 172: second special symbol display device, 173: first special symbol holding lamp, 174: second special symbol holding lamp, 175: ordinary symbol display device, 176: general symbol holding lamp, 180: main information storage means, 190: command transmission / reception means, 195: setting change means, 196: setting confirmation means, 197: setting display section, 200: effect control board, 200a: opening, 200m: back unit, 201: effect control CPU, 202: effect control ROM 203: Production control RAM, 204: I / O port circuit, 210: Production lottery random number generation means, 220: Production control means, 221: Production mode control means, 222: Hold information display control means, 223: Pre-reading notice control means , 224: decorative symbol determining means, 225: variation effect determining means, 226: notice effect determining means 227: Big hit production determination means, 230: Lamp production control means, 240: Character production control means, 250: Error production control means, 260: Production control information storage means, 270: Command transmission / reception means, 300: Image control board, 300 m : Liquid crystal base, 301: Image control CPU, 302: VDP, 303: Sound source IC, 304: ROM, 305: RAM, 306: I / O port circuit, 400: Discharge control board, 400p: RAM clear switch cover, 400q: RAM clear switch, 401: payout control CPU, 402: payout control ROM, 403: payout control RAM, 500: attacker unit, 600: power board, 600p: power switch cover, 600q: power switch, 622: ordinary electric accessory, 642: Special electric role , 710: symbol display area, 711: reel, 711a: left reel, 711b: middle reel, 711c: right reel, 721 (721a to 721g): light emitting area, 741a to 741c: seg, 751 (751a to 751d): No. 1 hold display LED, 752 (752a to 752d): second hold display LED

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means for executing production according to the progress of the game by the main control means,
A light emission effect device whose lighting is controlled by the effect control means,
A production input device for inputting input information to the production control means on the basis of an input operation by a player,
The effect control means is capable of executing a player operation input effect that can change the effect mode being executed based on the input of the input information by the effect input device.
In the production period of the player operation input production, an introduction production period for urging the input operation to the production input device, an input effective notification period for informing that the input operation to the production input device is effective, and After the operation of notifying the profit to be given to the player in the game executed by the main control means or the degree of expectation of the profit when the input operation to the effect input device satisfies a predetermined input condition The production period and
The effect control means, in the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect, the light emission effect by the light emission effect device is in a normal mode, and there is a higher expectation that the player will be provided with a profit more than in the normal mode. A gaming machine that can be executed in any one of a chance mode indicating that.

Images